Categories
Buick Encore GX

Buick Encore GX 2023 Connected Services User Manual

Buick Logo

Buick Encore GX 2023 Connected Services User Manual

Connected Services

Navigation

Navigation requires a specific OnStar or connected service plan.

PressBuick Enclave 2023 Connected Services User Manual1 to receive Turn-by-Turn directions or have them sent to the vehicle’s navigation screen, if equipped.

Turn-by-Turn Directions from the Services tab of the OnStar app to call an Advisor or select a recent or favorite destination. Touch the navigation icons to select home, address, or place. A destination transfer from OnStar will show the detail view of the destination when it is transferred from OnStar to the Navigation application. See www.onstar.com for a coverage map. Services vary by model. Map coverage is available in the United States and Canada.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

  1. Press Buick Enclave 2023 Connected Services User Manual1to connect to an advisor.
  2. Request directions to be downloaded to the vehicle.
  3. Follow the voice-guided commands.

Using Voice Commands During a Planned Route
Functionality of the Voice Command button, if equipped, may vary by vehicle and region. For some vehicles, press  Buick Enclave 2023 Connected Services User Manual2to open the OnStar app on the infotainment display.

Send Destination to Vehicle
Directions can be sent to the vehicle’s navigation screen, if equipped.

Press Buick Enclave 2023 Connected Services User Manual1 then ask the Advisor to download directions to the vehicle’s navigation system, if equipped. After the call ends, the navigation screen will provide prompts to begin driving directions. Routes that are sent to the navigation screen can only be canceled through the navigation system.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Connections
The following services help with staying connected.

For coverage maps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Ensuring Security

  • Change the default passwords for the Wi-Fi hotspot and my Buick mobile application. Make these passwords different from each other and use a combination of letters and numbers to increase the security.
  • Change the default name of the SSID (Service Set Identifier). This is your network’s name that is visible to other wireless devices. Choose a unique name and avoid family names or vehicle descriptions.

Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)

The vehicle may have a built-in Wi-Fi hotspot that provides access to the Internet and web content at 4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobile devices can be connected.

A data plan is required. Use the in-vehicle controls only when it is safe to do so.

  1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspot information, press Buick Enclave 2023 Connected Services User Manual2to open the OnStar app on the infotainment display, then select Wi-Fi On some vehicles, touch Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Settings on the screen.
  2. The Wi-Fi settings will display the Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID), password, and on some vehicles, the connection type (no Internet connection, 3G, 4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality (poor, good, excellent). The LTE icon shows a connection to Wi-Fi. It is possible that the icon may not illuminate even though the vehicle has an active connection.
  1. To change the SSID or password, press Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR to connect with an Advisor. On some vehicles, the SSID and password can be changed in the Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.

After initial set-up, your vehicle’s Wi-Fi hotspot will connect automatically to your mobile devices. Manage data usage by turning Wi-Fi on or off on your mobile device, by using the myBuick mobile app, or by contacting an OnStar Advisor. On some vehicles, Wi-Fi can also be managed from the Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.

MyBuick Mobile App (If Available)
Download the myBuick mobile app to compatible Apple and Android smartphones. Buick users can access the following services from a smartphone:

  • Remotely start/stop the vehicle, if factory-equipped.
  • Lock/unlock doors, if equipped with automatic locks.
  • Activate the horn and lamps
  • Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oil life, or tire pressure, if factory-equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor System.
  • Send destinations to the vehicle.
  • Locate the vehicle on a map (U.S. market only).
  • Turn the vehicle’s Wi-Fi hotspot on/off, manage settings, and monitor data consumption, if
  • Locate a dealer and schedule service.
  • Request roadside assistance.
  • Set a parking reminder with pin drop, take a photo, make a note, and set a timer.
  • Connect with Buick on social media.

Features are subject to change. For my Buick mobile app information and compatibility, see my.buick.com.

An active OnStar or connected service plan may be required. A compatible device, factory-installed remote start, and power locks are required. Data rates apply. See www.onstar.com for details and system limitations.

Remote Services
Contact an OnStar Advisor to unlock the doors or sound the horn and flash the lamps.

Marketplace
OnStar Advisors can provide offers from restaurants and retailers on your route, help locate hotels, or book a room. These services vary by market.

Diagnostics

By monitoring and reporting on the vehicle’s key systems, OnStar Advanced Diagnostics, if equipped, provides a way to keep up on maintenance. Capabilities vary by model.

See www.onstar.com for details and system limitations. Features are subject to change. For updates on feature capabilities, see my.buick.com. Message and data rates may apply.

2023 Buick Encore Gx Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Useful Links

View Full Manual: Buick Encore GX 2023 User Manual | Auto User Guide
Download Manual: Manuals and Guides | Vehicle Support | Buick

Related Article

2024 Buick Envista Specs, Price, Features, Mileage and Review

2023 Buick Enclave Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2023 Buick Envision Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2024 Buick Encore GX Specs, Price, Features, Mileage and Review

Categories
Buick Encore GX

Buick Encore GX 2023 OnStar User Manual

Buick Logo

Buick Encore GX 2023 OnStar User Manual

OnStar Overview

OnStar Overview

Buick Encore GX 2023 OnStar User Manual 01

Buick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 01Voice Command Button

Buick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 02 Blue OnStar Button

Buick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 03Red Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with a comprehensive, in-vehicle system that can connect to an OnStar Advisor for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Connections, and Diagnostics Services. OnStar services may require a paid service plan and data plan.

OnStar requires the vehicle battery and electrical system, cellular service, and GPS satellite signals to be available and operating. OnStar acts as a link to existing emergency service providers. OnStar may collect information about you and your vehicle, including location information. See OnStar User Terms, Privacy Statement, and Software Terms for more details including system limitations at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light is next to the OnStar buttons. If the status light is:

  • Solid Green: System is ready.
  • Flashing Green: On a call.
  • Red: Indicates a problem .
  • Off: System is off. Press Buick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 02 twice to speak with an OnStar Advisor.

Press Buick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 02 or call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) to speak to an Advisor.

Functionality of the Voice Command button may vary by vehicle and region.

Press Buick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 01 to:

Open the OnStar app on the infotainment display. If equipped, the infotainment system has OnStar controls in the embedded OnStar app on the Home Page. Most OnStar functions that can be performed with the buttons can be done using the app. To open the app, touch the OnStar icon on the Home Page. App updates require a corresponding service plan. Features vary by region and model. Features are subject to change. For more information, see my.buick.com/learn or press Buick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 02

Or

  • Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation voice command.
  • Obtain and customize the Wi-Fi hotspot name or SSID and password, if equipped.

Press Buick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 02 to connect to an Advisor to:

  • Verify account information or update contact information.
  • Get driving direction.
  • Receive a Diagnostic check of the vehicle’s key operating systems.
  • Receive Roadside Assistance
  • Manage Wi-Fi Settings, if equipped.

Press Buick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 03to get a priority connection to an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:

  • Get help for an emergency.
  • Be a Good Samaritan or respond to an AMBER Alert.
  • Get assistance in severe weather or other crisis situations and find evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

Emergency

Emergency Services require an active safety and security plan. With Automatic Crash Response, built-in sensors can automatically alert a specially trained OnStar Advisor who is immediately connected in to the vehicle to help.

PressBuick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 03 for a priority connection to an OnStar Advisor who can contact emergency service providers, direct them to your exact location, and relay important information.
With OnStar Crisis Assist, specially trained Advisors are available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to provide a central point of contact, assistance, and information during a crisis.
With Roadside Assistance, Advisors can locate a nearby service provider to help with a flat tire, a battery jump, or an empty gas tank.

Security
If equipped, OnStar provides these services:

  • With Stolen Vehicle Assistance, OnStar Advisors can use GPS to pinpoint the vehicle and help authorities quickly recover it.
  • With Remote Ignition Block, if equipped, OnStar can block the vehicle from being restarted.
  • With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,

if equipped, OnStar can work with law enforcement to gradually slow the vehicle down.

Theft Alarm Notification
If equipped, if the doors are locked and the vehicle alarm sounds, a notification by text, e-mail, or phone call will be sent. If the vehicle is stolen, an OnStar Advisor can work with authorities to recover the vehicle .

OnStar Additional Information

In-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages may play important information at the following times:

  • Prior to vehicle purchase. Press Buick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 02 to set up an account.
  • After change in ownership and at 90 days.

Transferring Service

Press Buick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 02 to request account transfer eligibility information. The Advisor can cancel or change account information.

Selling/Transferring the Vehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) immediately to terminate your OnStar or connected services if the vehicle is disposed of, sold, transferred, or if the lease ends.

Reactivation for Subsequent Owners

Press Buick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 02 and follow the prompts to speak to an Advisor as soon as possible. The Advisor will update vehicle records and explain OnStar or connected service options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response, Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Remote Services, and Roadside Assistance are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar services are available everywhere or on all vehicles. For more information, a full description of OnStar services, system limitations, and OnStar User Terms, Privacy Statement, and Software Terms:

OnStar or connected services cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area. The wireless service provider must also have coverage, network capacity, reception, and technology compatible with OnStar or connected services. Service involving location information about the vehicle cannot work unless GPS signals are available, unobstructed, and compatible with the OnStar hardware. OnStar or connected services may not work if the OnStar equipment is not properly installed or it has not been properly maintained. If equipment or software is added, connected, or modified, OnStar or connected services may not work. Other problems beyond the control of OnStar — such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather, electrical system design and architecture of the vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone network congestion or jamming — may prevent service.

See Radio Frequency Statement page 344.

Services for People with Disabilities
Advisors provide services to help with physical disabilities and medical conditions.

Press Buick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 02 to help:

  • Locate a gas station with an attendant to pump gas.
  • Find a hotel, restaurant, etc., that meets accessibility needs.
  • Provide directions to the closest hospital or pharmacy in urgent situations

TTY Users
OnStar has the ability to communicate to deaf, hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired customers while in the vehicle. The available TTY system can provide in-vehicle access to all OnStar services, except Virtual Advisor and OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation.

If equipped, TTY mode can be turned on or off by touching Settings, then Apps, and then Phone. When TTY mode is on, phone calls can be made or received with OnStar using the infotainment display.

OnStar Personal Identification Number (PIN)
A PIN is needed to access some OnStar services. The PIN will need to be changed the first time when speaking with an Advisor. To change the OnStar PIN, contact an OnStar Advisor by pressing Buick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 02 or calling 1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty
OnStar equipment may be warranted as part of the vehicle warranty.

Languages
The vehicle can be programmed to respond in multiple languages. Press Buick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 02 and ask for an Advisor. Advisors are available in English, Spanish, and French. Available languages may vary by country.

Potential Issues
OnStar cannot perform Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the vehicle has been off continuously for an extended period of time without an ignition cycle. To find out the duration of time that applies for the vehicle, contact an OnStar Advisor by pressing Q or calling 1-888-4ONSTAR. If the vehicle has not been started for an extended period of time, OnStar can contact Roadside Assistance or a locksmith to help gain access to the vehicle.

Global Positioning System (GPS)
Obstruction of the GPS can occur in a large city with tall buildings; in parking garages; around airports; in tunnels and underpasses; or in an area with very dense trees. If GPS signals are not available, the OnStar system should still operate to call OnStar. However, OnStar could have difficulty identifying the exact location.

  • In emergency situations, OnStar can use the last stored GPS location to send to emergency responders.

A temporary loss of GPS can cause loss of the ability to send a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. The Advisor may give a verbal route or may ask for a call back after the vehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas
Cellular reception is required for OnStar to send remote signals to the vehicle. Do not place items over or near the antenna to prevent blocking cellular and GPS signal reception.

Unable to Connect to OnStar Message
If there is limited cellular coverage or the cellular network has reached maximum capacity, this message may come on. Press Buick Enclave 2023 OnStar User Manual 02 to try the call again or try again after driving a few miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues
OnStar services require a vehicle electrical system, wireless service, and GPS satellite technologies to be available and operating for features to function properly. These systems may not operate if the battery is discharged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment
The OnStar system is integrated into the electrical architecture of the vehicle. Do not add any electrical equipment. See Add-On Electrical Equipment page 248 Added electrical equipment may interfere with the operation of the OnStar system and cause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates
OnStar or GM may remotely deliver software updates or changes to the vehicle without further notice or consent. These updates or changes may enhance or maintain safety, security, or the operation of the vehicle or the vehicle systems.

Software updates or changes may affect or erase data or settings that are stored in the vehicle, such as saved navigation destinations or pre-set radio stations.

Neither OnStar nor GM is responsible for any affected or erased data or settings.

These updates or changes may also collect personal information. Such collection is described in the OnStar privacy statement or separately disclosed at the time of installation. These updates or changes may also cause a system to automatically communicate with GM servers to collect information about vehicle system status, identify whether updates or changes are available, or deliver updates or changes. An active OnStar agreement constitutes consent to these software updates or changes and agreement that either OnStar or GM may remotely deliver them to the vehicle.

Privacy
The complete OnStar Privacy Statement may be found at www.onstar.com (U.S.), or www.onstar.ca (Canada). We recommend that you review it. If you have any questions, call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or press Q to speak with an Advisor. Users of wireless communications are cautioned that the privacy of any information sent via wireless cellular communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept or access transmissions and private communications without consent.

OnStar – Software Acknowledgements
To obtain the source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL, and other open-source licenses, that are contained in this product, please visit https://opensource.lge.com. In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty disclaimers, and copyright notices are available for download. This offer is valid for a period of three years after our last shipment of this product. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.

*Provided through LG Electronics Inc., which is solely responsible for provisions of related OSS compliance.

2023 Buick Encore Gx Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Useful Links

View Full Manual: Buick Encore GX 2023 User Manual | Auto User Guide
Download Manual: Manuals and Guides | Vehicle Support | Buick

Related Article

2024 Buick Envista Specs, Price, Features, Mileage and Review

2023 Buick Enclave Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2023 Buick Envision Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2024 Buick Encore GX Specs, Price, Features, Mileage and Review

Categories
Buick Encore GX

Buick Encore GX 2023 Customer Information User Manual

Buick Logo

Buick Encore GX 2023 Customer Information User Manual

Customer Information

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Buick. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management.

Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager, contact the owner of your dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO : If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by your dealership without further help, in the U.S., call 1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact General Motors of Canada Customer Care Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give the inquiry prompt attention. Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance representative:

  • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the Dealership name and location .
  • Vehicle delivery date and present or mileage.

When contacting Buick, remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest following Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners : Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with the new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) AUTO LINE® Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB AUTO LINE Program is an out-of-court program administered by BBB National Programs, Inc. to settle automotive

disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days.

If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB AUTO LINE Program using the toll-free telephone number or write them at the following address:

BBB AUTO LINE a Division of BBB National Programs, Inc. 1676 International Drive

Suite 550
McLean, VA 22102
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.bbbautoline.org

This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners : In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, General Motors of Canada Company wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration program. General Motors of Canada Company has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the time you file your complaint to the final decision, should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors Customer Care Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give the inquiry prompt attention. Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance representative:

  • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the Dealership name and Vehicle delivery date and present When contacting Buick, remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest following Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with the new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in.

Steps One and Two, you can file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) AUTO LINE® Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB AUTO LINE Program is an out-of-court program administered by BBB National Programs, Inc. to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days.

If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB AUTO LINE Program using the toll-free telephone number or write them at the following address:

BBB AUTO LINE a Division of BBB National Programs, Inc. 1676 International Drive

Suite 550
McLean, VA 22102
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.bbbautoline.org

This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners : In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, General Motors of Canada Company wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration program. General Motors of Canada Company has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the time you file your complaint to the final decision, should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors Customer Care Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to: Mediation/Arbitration Program c/o Customer Care Centre

General Motors of Canada Company 500 Wentworth Street W Oshawa, ON L1J 0C5

The inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

Customer Assistance Offices

Buick is committed to assisting customers. Visit us online at www.buick.com/support (U.S.) or www.my.buick.ca (Canada) to chat with us or find answers to commonly asked questions, tips, vehicle how-to instructions, and available support services.
Need more help? Use the phone numbers or mailing addresses below for additional assistance.

United States and Puerto Rico

Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136 Detroit, MI 48232-5136
1-800-521-7300
TTY: Dial 711 relay service and contact 1-800-833-2438
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112

Canada

Customer Care Centre
General Motors of Canada Company 500 Wentworth Street W
Oshawa, ON L1J 0C5
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and/or who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Buick is able to assist. Please dial the national 711 relay service and contact 1-800-833-2438. TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

 

Online Account
Create a Buick Account (U.S.) at buick.com
Learn more about your vehicle features, shop for and manage your connected services and OnStar plans, and access diagnostic information specific to your vehicle.
Membership Benefits

Buick Enclave 2023 Customer Information User Manual 01Download owner’s manuals and view vehicle-specific how-to videos.

Buick Enclave 2023 Customer Information User Manual 03View maintenance schedules, alerts, and Vehicle Diagnostic Information. Schedule service appointments.

Buick Enclave 2023 Customer Information User Manual 02 View service records from your dealership and add your own.

Buick Enclave 2023 Customer Information User Manual 05Select a dealer and view locations, maps, phone numbers, and hours.

Buick Enclave 2023 Customer Information User Manual 04Track your vehicle’s warranty information.

Buick Enclave 2023 Customer Information User Manual 06View active recalls by Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). See Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) page 331

Buick Enclave 2023 Customer Information User Manual 07Manage your profile and payment information. View your GM Rewards Card earnings and My Buick Rewards points.

Buick Enclave 2023 Customer Information User Manual 08Chat with online help representatives. Visit buick.com and create an account today. Buick Owner Centre (Canada) mybuick.ca

Visit the Buick Owner Centre at mybuick.ca (English) or my.buick.ca (French) to access similar benefits to the U.S. site.

GM Mobility Reimbursement Program

Buick Encore GX 2023 Customer Information User Manual 01

This program is available to qualified applicants for cost reimbursement, up to certain limits, of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for the vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/ scooter lift for the vehicle.

To learn about the GM Mobility program, see www.gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text Telephone (TTY) users, please dial the national 711 relay service and contact 1-800-323-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility program. See www.gm.ca, or call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (800-463-7483) for details.

TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance Program

For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call 1-800-252-1112;
(Text Telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following information ready:

  • Your name, home address, and home telephone number
  • Telephone number of your location
  • Location of the vehicle
  • Model, year, color, and license plate number of the vehicle
  • Odometer reading and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
  • Description of the problem

Coverage
Services are provided for the duration of the vehicle’s powertrain warranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In Canada, a person driving a vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. General Motors North America and Buick reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification.

General Motors North America and Buick reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too often, or the same type of claim is made many times.

Services Provided
Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.

  • Lock-Out Service: Service to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may be available if you have For security reasons, the driver must present identification before this service is given.
  • Emergency Tow from a Public Road or Highway: Tow to the nearest Buick dealer for warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven.

Assistance is not given when the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, or snow.

  • Flat Tire Change: Service to change a flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped, must be in good condition and properly inflated. It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.
  • Battery Jump Start: Service to jump-start a dead battery.
  • Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty event, incidental expenses may be reimbursed within the Powertrain warranty period. Items considered are reasonable and customary hotel, meals, rental car, or a vehicle being delivered back to the customer, up to 500 miles.
Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance
  • Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
  • Legal
  • Mounting, dismounting, or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction.

Service is not provided if a vehicle is in an area that is not accessible to the service vehicle or is not a regularly traveled or maintained public road, which includes ice and winter roads. Off-road use is not covered.

Services Specific to Canadian-Purchased Vehicles

  • Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement is up to 7 liters. Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service.
  • Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
  • Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must be over 150 km from where your trip was started to qualify.

Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a copy of the repair orders are required. Once authorization has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements and explain how to receive payment.

  • Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be provided right away, the Roadside Assistance advisor may give permission to get local emergency road You will receive payment, up to $100, after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be covered, however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility.

Scheduling Service Appointments
When the vehicle requires warranty service, contact your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising the service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety related. If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this, and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bring the vehicle for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same-day repair.

Courtesy Transportation Program
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada), Federal Emission, Extended Powertrain or Electric specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportation options are available to assist in reducing inconvenience when warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate manual entitled “Limited Warranty and Owner Assistance Information” produced for new vehicles provides detailed warranty coverage information.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to do so, your dealer may offer the following transportation options:

Shuttle Service
This includes one-way or round-trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters of your dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If overnight warranty repairs are needed, and public transportation is used, the expense must be supported by original receipts and within the maximum amount allowed by GM. If U.S. customers arrange their own transportation, limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. See your dealer for information.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle
For an overnight warranty repair, the dealer may provide an available courtesy rental vehicle or provide for reimbursement of a rental vehicle. Reimbursement is limited and must be supported by original receipts as well as a signed and completed rental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.

Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. Additional fees such as fuel, rental vehicle insurance, taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair are also your responsibility.
It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Contact your dealer for specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair
If the vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs diminish the vehicle resale value, and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which the vehicle was originally built.

Genuine GM Collision parts are the best choice to ensure that the vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain the vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety performance; however, the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not covered by the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for the vehicle. As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts is not covered by that warranty.

Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs. Your dealer may have a collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and state-of-the-art equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable equipment.

Insuring the Vehicle
Protect your investment in the GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to the GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs through the use of aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you ensure that the vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasing company may require you to have insurance that ensures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read the lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of the lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call emergency services for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of. Move the vehicle only if its position puts you in danger, or you are instructed to move it by a police officer.

Give only the necessary information to police and other parties involved in the crash.

For emergency towing see Roadside Assistance Program page 339

Gather the following information:

  • Driver name, address, and telephone number
  • Driver license number
  • Owner name, address, and telephone number
  • Vehicle license plate number
  • Vehicle make, model, and model year
  • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
  • Insurance company and policy number
  • General description of the damage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facility that uses quality replacement parts. See “Collision Parts” earlier in this section.

If the airbag has inflated, see What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? page 56.

Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process
In the event that the vehicle requires damage repairs, GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take the vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by the GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with the repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember, if the vehicle is leased, you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company’s collision policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that company. In such cases, you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as the cost stays within reasonable limits.

Publication Ordering Information Service Manuals
Service manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on the engine/propulsion, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical system, steering system, body, etc.

Customer Literature
Owner’s manuals are written specifically for owners and are intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner’s manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models.

Customer literature publications available for purchase include owner’s manuals, warranty manuals, and portfolios. Portfolios include an owner’s manual, warranty manual, if applicable, and zip lock bag or pouch.

Current and Past Models
Service manuals and customer literature are available for many current and past model year GM vehicles.

To order, call 1-800-551-4123 Monday–Friday, 8:00 a.m.–6:00 p.m. Eastern Time

For credit card orders only (VISA, MasterCard, or Discover), see Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

To order by mail, write to:
Helm, Incorporated Attention: Customer Service 47911 Halyard Drive

Plymouth, MI 48170

Make checks payable in U.S. funds.

Radio Frequency Statement
This vehicle uses license-exempt transmitters / receivers / systems that operate on a radio frequency that complies with Part 15/ Part 18 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development (ISED) Canada’s license-exempt RSS(s) / RSP-100 / ICES-GEN.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

  1. The device may not cause harmful
  2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to https://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from https://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that the vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada immediately, and notify General Motors of Canada Company. Call Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0510; go to: www.tc.gc.ca/recalls (English) www.tc.gc.ca/rappels (French) or write to:

Transport Canada
Motor Vehicle Safety Directorate Defect Investigations and Recalls Division
80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, notify General Motors.

In the U.S., call 1-800-521-7300, or write: Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232–5136

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Company Customer Care Centre
500 Wentworth Street W Oshawa, ON L1J 0C5

In Mexico, call 800-200-28425 or 800-466-0818.
In other Central America and Caribbean Countries, call 52-555-901-2369.

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy

The vehicle has a number of computers that record information about the vehicle’s performance and how it is driven or used. For example, the vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance, to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy them in a crash, and, if equipped, to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may store data to help the dealer technician service the vehicle or to help GM improve safety or features. Some modules may also store data about how the vehicle is operated, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules may retain personal preferences, such as radio presets, seat positions, and temperature settings.

Cybersecurity
GM collects information about the use of your vehicle including operational and safety related information. We collect this information to provide, evaluate, improve, and troubleshoot our products and services and to develop new products and services.

The protection of vehicle electronics systems and customer data from unauthorized outside electronic access or control is important to GM. GM maintains appropriate security standards, practices, guidelines and controls aimed at defending the vehicle and the vehicle service ecosystem against unauthorized electronic access, detecting possible malicious activity in related networks, and responding to suspected cybersecurity incidents in a timely, coordinated and effective manner. Security incidents could impact your safety or compromise your private data. To minimize security risks, please do not connect your vehicle electronic systems to unauthorized devices or connect your vehicle to any unknown or untrusted networks (such as Bluetooth, WIFI or similar technology). In the event you suspect any security incident impacting your data or the safe operation of your vehicle, please stop operating your vehicle and contact your dealer.

Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

  • How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
  • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
  • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
  • How fast the vehicle was traveling

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

Note
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access these data or share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in response to an official request by police or similar government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the discovery process; or, as permitted by law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes, where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar
If the vehicle is equipped with OnStar and has an active service plan, additional data may be collected and transmitted through the OnStar system. This includes information about the vehicle’s operation; collisions involving the vehicle; the use of the vehicle and its features, including infotainment; and the location and approximate GPS speed of the vehicle. Refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions and Privacy Statement on the OnStar website.
See OnStar Additional Information page 350.

Infotainment System
If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system as part of the infotainment system, the use of the system may result in the storage of destinations, addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip information. See the infotainment section for information on stored data and for deletion instructions.

2023 Buick Encore Gx Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Useful Links

View Full Manual: Buick Encore GX 2023 User Manual | Auto User Guide
Download Manual: Manuals and Guides | Vehicle Support | Buick

Related Article

2024 Buick Envista Specs, Price, Features, Mileage and Review

2023 Buick Enclave Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2023 Buick Envision Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2024 Buick Encore GX Specs, Price, Features, Mileage and Review

Categories
Buick Encore GX

Buick Encore GX 2023 Technical Data User Manual

Buick Logo

Buick Encore GX 2023 Technical Data User Manual

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Buick Encore GX 2023 Technical Data User Manual 01

This legal identifier is in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver side of the vehicle. It can be seen through the windshield from outside. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) also appears on the Vehicle Certification label and certificates of title and registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code identifies the vehicle’s engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications page 333 for the vehicle’s engine code.

Service Parts Identification
There may be a large barcode on the certification label on the center pillar that you can scan for the following information:

  • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
  • Model designation
  • Paint information
  • Production options

If there is not a large barcode on this label, then you will find this same information on a label under the hatch area on the passenger side.

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

Application Capacities
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the hood. See your dealer for more information.
Engine Cooling System*
1.2L L3 Gas Engine 6.3 L 6.7 qt
1.3L L3 Gas Engine 7.4 L 7.8 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
1.2L L3 Gas Engine 4.0 L 4.2 qt
1.3L L3 Gas Engine 4.5 L 4.8 qt
 

Application

Capacities
Metric English
Fuel Tank 50 L 13.2 gal
Transfer Case Fluid 0.23 L 0.24 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
*Engine cooling system capacity values are based on the entire cooling system and its components.

Engine specification 

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
1.2L L3 Gas Engine (LIH) 2 Automatic 0.6 – 0.7 mm (0.024-0.028 in)
1.3L L3 Gas Engine (L3T) L Automatic 0.65 – 0.75 mm (0.025-0.030 in)
Spark plug gaps are preset by the manufacturer. Re-gapping the spark plug is not recommended and can damage the spark plug.

Engine Drive Belt Routing

Buick Encore GX 2023 Technical Data User Manual 02

1.2L L3 Gas Engine

Buick Encore GX 2023 Technical Data User Manual 03

1.3L L3 Gas Engine

2023 Buick Encore Gx Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Useful Links

View Full Manual: Buick Encore GX 2023 User Manual | Auto User Guide
Download Manual: Manuals and Guides | Vehicle Support | Buick

Related Article

2024 Buick Envista Specs, Price, Features, Mileage and Review

2023 Buick Enclave Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2023 Buick Envision Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2024 Buick Encore GX Specs, Price, Features, Mileage and Review

Categories
Buick Encore GX

Buick Encore GX 2023 Service and Maintenance User Manual

Buick Logo

Buick Encore GX 2023 Service and Maintenance User Manual

The 2023 Buick Encore GX is a great example of not only style and efficiency but also a commitment to great service and maintenance, in the world of car ownership. The Encore GX is a vehicle that is made to be both luxurious and useful. It is also intended to make sure that every trip is smooth and worry-free. From simple things like changing the oil and rotating the tires to more specialized care, Buick’s focus on service excellence is clear. With a clear recommended repair schedule and certified dealerships and service centers, owners of the 2023 Encore GX can be sure that their vehicle’s maintenance needs will be taken care of by professionals. The Encore GX’s service and maintenance options put ease of use, dependability, and peace of mind first. This shows how committed Buick is to improving every part of ownership.

General Information

General Information

Your vehicle is an important investment. This section describes the required maintenance for the vehicle. Follow this schedule to help protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance. It may also help to maintain the value of the vehicle if it is sold. It is the responsibility of the owner to have all required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicians who can perform required maintenance using genuine replacement parts. They have up-to-date tools and equipment for fast and accurate diagnostics. Many dealers have extended evening and Saturday hours, courtesy transportation, and online scheduling to assist with service needs.

Your dealer recognizes the importance of providing competitively priced maintenance and repair services. With trained technicians, the dealer is the place for routine maintenance such as oil changes and tire rotations and additional maintenance items like tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper blades.

Caution
Damage caused by improper maintenance can lead to costly repairs and may not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, recommended fluids, and lubricants are important to keep the vehicle in good working condition.
Do not have chemical flushes that are not approved by GM performed on the vehicle. The use of flushes, solvents, cleaners, or lubricants that are not approved by GM could damage the vehicle, requiring expensive repairs that are not covered by the vehicle warranty.

The Tire Rotation and Required Services are the responsibility of the vehicle owner. It is recommended to have your dealer perform these services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi. Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition, improves fuel economy, and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people use vehicles, maintenance needs vary. There may need to be more frequent checks and services. The Additional Required Services – Normal are for vehicles that:

  • Carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits page 190.
  •  
  • Are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits.
  • Use the recommended fuel. See Recommended Fuel page 237.

Refer to the information in the Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services -Normal chart.
The Additional Required Services – Severe are for vehicles that are:

  • Mainly driven in heavy city traffic in hot weather.
    Mainly driven in hilly or mountainous terrain.
    Frequently towing a trailer.
    Used for high speed or competitive driving.
  • Used for taxi, police, or delivery service.
  • Refer to the information in the Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services -Severe chart.

Warning
Performing maintenance work can be dangerous and can cause serious injury. Perform maintenance work only if the required information, proper tools, and equipment are available. If they are not, see your dealer to have a trained technician do the work. See Doing Your Own Service Work page 251.

Maintenance Schedule

Tire Rotation and Required Services Every 12 000 km (7,500 mi)
Tires are rotated to achieve a more uniform wear for all tires. The first rotation is the most important.
Anytime unusual wear is noticed, rotate the tires as soon as possible, check for proper tire inflation pressure, and check for damaged tires or wheels. If the unusual wear continues after the rotation, check the wheel alignment. See When It Is Time for New Tires 0 298 and Wheel Replacement page 302.

  • Perform Multi-Point Vehicle Inspection.
    See Multi-Point Vehicle Inspection (MPVI) page 326.
  • Lubricate body components. See Exterior Care page 315.

Additional Required Services –  Normal  Service

Every 12 000 km (7,500 mi)

  • Check engine oil level and oil
  • life percentage. If needed, change engine oil and filter, and reset oil life system. Or when the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays, have the engine oil and filter changed within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). If driven under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate the need for vehicle service for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and the oil life system must be reset. Your trained dealer technician can perform this work. If the engine oil life system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within 5 000 km (3,000 mi) since the last service .
  • Reset the oil life system when the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System page  258.
    • When the REPLACE AT NEXT OIL CHANGE

    message displays, the engine air filter should be replaced at the next engine oil change. When the REPLACE ENGINE AIR FILTER SOON message displays, the engine air filter should be replaced at the earliest convenience. Reset the engine air filter life system after the engine air filter is replaced. See Engine Air Filter Life System page  259.

    Every 36 000 km (22,500 mi)

    • Replace passenger compartment air Or every 24 months, whichever comes first. More frequent passenger compartment air filter replacement may be needed if driving in areas with heavy traffic, poor air quality, high dust levels, or environmental allergens. Passenger compartment air filter replacement may also be needed if there is reduced airflow, window fogging, or odors. Your GM dealer can help determine when to replace the filter.

     

  • Every 156 000 km (97,500 mi)
    • Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires and/or boots.

     

  • Every 161 000 km (100,000 mi)
    • Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. See Gas Strut(s) page 271

     

  • Every 240 000 km (150,000 mi)
    • Change rear axle fluid, if equipped with AWD. Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/ or axles and should be replaced.
    • Drain and fill engine cooling Or every six years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System page  260.
     
  • Severe Conditions Requiring More Frequent Maintenance*
    • Public service, military, or commercial use vehicles to include the following:
    • Ambulances, police cars, and emergency rescue vehicles. Civilian vehicles such as light duty pickup trucks, SUVs, and passenger cars that are used in military applications.
    • Recovery vehicles such as tow trucks and flatbed single vehicle carriers or any vehicle that is consistently used in towing trailers or other loads.
    • High use commercial vehicles such as courier delivery vehicles, private security patrol vehicles, or any vehicles that operate on a 24–hour basis.
    • Any vehicle consistently operated in a high sand or dust environment such as those used on oil pipelines and similar applications.
      The oil life indicator will show you when to change the oil and filter. Under severe conditions the indicator may come on before 12 000 km (7,500 mi).
      Footnote: Under extreme driving conditions listed above, it may be necessary to replace your spark plugs at more frequent intervals. For further assistance in determining the most suitable service maintenance intervals for your vehicle, please contact your authorized GM Dealer.
    • Vehicles that are regularly used for short trips of 6 km (4 mi) or less.

     

  • The oil life indicator will show you when to change the oil and filter. Under severe conditions the indicator may come on before 12 000 km (7,500 mi).

* Footnote: Under extreme driving conditions listed above, it may be necessary to replace your spark plugs at more frequent intervals. For further assistance in determining the most suitable service maintenance intervals for your vehicle, please contact your authorized GM Dealer.

Extreme service is for vehicles mainly driven off-road in four-wheel drive or used in farming, mining, forestry, or snow plowing.

Additional Required Services – Severe Service

  • Every 72 000 km (45,000 mi)
  • Change automatic transmission
  • Every 120 000 km (75,000 mi)
  • Change rear axle fluid, if equipped with AWD. Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/ or axles and should be replaced.

Owner Checks and Services

  • Every Five Years
  • Replace brake
  • Every Seven Years

Replace Air Conditioning Desiccant every seven years. The air conditioning system requires maintenance every seven years. This service requires replacement of the desiccant to help the longevity and  efficient operation of the air conditioning system. This service can be complex. See your dealer

Multi-Point Vehicle Inspection (MPVI)

A Multi Point Vehicle Inspection (MPVI) completed by a GM dealer technician is a maintenance assessment of your vehicle. The benefit of the MPVI is to identify and inform the customer of service items that require immediate attention and those that may require attention in the future.

The technician will perform the following checks on your vehicle. For a complete list of checks, inspections, and services, see your dealer.

Some items may not apply to your vehicle and/or region.

Diagnostics

  • OnStar active, if equipped
  • Service history/recall check

Engine Oil and Filter

  • Engine oil
  • Oil life monitor

Engine Oil and Filter

  • Engine oil
  • Oil life monitor
    • Reset oil life monitor
  •  

Exterior Lights

  • Visual inspection

Windshield and Wipers

  • Visual inspection

Battery

  • Battery visual inspection
  • Battery test results
  • Battery cables and connections

Systems, Fluids, and Visible Leak Inspection

  • Engine oil
  • Transmission
  • Drive axle
  • Transfer case
  • Engine cooling system
  • Power steering, if equipped
  • Fuel system
  • Windshield washer fluid

Tire Inspection

  • Tire pressure, tread depth, and wear
  • Rotation, if applicable
  • Alignment check, optional
  • Reset tire pressure monitor
    • Check tire sealant expiration date, if equipped
    • Check spare tire, if equipped
  • Check tire sealant expiration date, if equipped
  • Check spare tire, if equipped
Brakes
  • Check brake system
Visible and Functional Inspections
  • Seat belt components
  • Exhaust system
  • Accelerator pedal
  • Passenger compartment air filter, if equipped
  • Engine air filter
  • Hoses
  • Belts
  • Shocks and struts
  • Steering components
  • Axle boots or driveshaft and u-joints
  • Compartment lift struts, if equipped
  • Floor mats secured, no interference with pedals
  • Horn
  • Ignition lock, if equipped
  • Starter switch
  • Evaporative control system
  •  
  • Lubricate
    • Chassis components

Special Application Services

  • Severe Commercial Use Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis components every oil change.
  • Have underbody flushing service performed. See “Underbody Maintenance” on Exterior Care page 315.

2023 Buick Encore Gx Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

FAQ

1. Q: What is the recommended service schedule for the 2023 Buick Encore GX?

A: The recommended service schedule typically includes regular maintenance at specific mileage intervals. Consult the owner’s manual for details.

2. Q: How often should I change the oil in the 2023 Encore GX?

A: The oil change interval for the 2023 Encore GX is usually around every 5,000 to 7,500 miles, depending on driving conditions and the type of oil used.

3. Q: Can I take the 2023 Encore GX to any dealership or service centre for maintenance?

A: While you can choose any reputable dealership or service center, it’s recommended to visit a Buick-certified service facility for specialized care.

4. Q: What type of oil does the 2023 Encore GX require?

A: The type of oil required depends on the engine specifications. Consult the owner’s manual for the recommended oil viscosity and type.

5. Q: Is there a warranty for the 2023 Encore GX’s service and maintenance?

A: Yes, the 2023 Encore GX typically comes with a new vehicle limited warranty that covers certain service and maintenance issues during a specified period.

6. Q: How often should I rotate the tires on the 2023 Encore GX?

A: Tire rotation is recommended approximately every 6,000 to 8,000 miles to ensure even tire wear and prolong tire life.

7. Q: Can I perform basic maintenance tasks on the 2023 Encore GX myself?

A: Some basic maintenance tasks, like checking fluid levels and tire pressure, can be done by the owner. However, more complex tasks are best left to professionals.

8. Q: Does the 2023 Encore GX have a maintenance reminder system?

A: Yes, many modern vehicles, including the 2023 Encore GX, have maintenance reminder systems that provide notifications for oil changes, tire rotations, and more.

9. Q: How often should I replace the air filter in the 2023 Encore GX?

A: Air filter replacement intervals vary, but it’s generally recommended every 15,000 to 30,000 miles or as per the owner’s manual.

10. Q: What is covered under the 2023 Encore GX’s roadside assistance program?

A: The roadside assistance program typically covers services like towing, battery jump-starts, flat tire changes, and fuel delivery.

11. Q: Are there recommended service intervals for transmission fluid in the 2023 Encore GX?

A: Transmission fluid replacement intervals vary. Consult the owner’s manual for the manufacturer’s recommendations.

12. Q: Is regular maintenance required to keep the 2023 Encore GX’s warranty valid?

A: Yes, adhering to the recommended maintenance schedule is often necessary to maintain the validity of the vehicle’s warranty.

13. Q: Can the 2023 Encore GX’s service history be tracked electronically?

A: Yes, many vehicles have electronic systems that allow service centers to track maintenance history, which can be beneficial for resale value.

14. Q: Does Buick offer prepaid maintenance plans for the 2023 Encore GX?

A: Yes, Buick often offers prepaid maintenance plans that cover routine service for a specified period, providing convenience and cost savings.

Categories
Buick Encore GX

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual

Buick Logo

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual

General Information

General Information
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer. You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 01

California Perchlorate Materials Requirements

Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries contained in electronic keys, may contain perchlorate materials. Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories and Modifications

Adding non-dealer accessories or making modifications to the vehicle can affect vehicle performance and safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, Driver Assistance Systems, and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. These accessories or modifications could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to suspension components caused by modifying vehicle height outside of factory settings will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle components resulting from modifications or the installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including control module or software modifications, is not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts.

GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle. See your dealer to accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories installed by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle page 61.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your Own Service Work
Warning
It can be dangerous to work on your vehicle if you do not have the proper knowledge, service manual, tools,
or parts. Always follow owner’s manual procedures and consult the service manual for your vehicle before doing any service work.

If doing some of your own service work, use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Publication Ordering Information page 344

This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle page 60.
If equipped with remote vehicle start, open the hood before performing any service work to prevent remote starting the vehicle accidentally. See Remote Vehicle Start page 14.

Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed. See Maintenance Records page 331

Caution
Even small amounts of contamination can cause damage to vehicle systems. Do not allow contaminants to contact the fluids, reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

Hood
Warning
For vehicles with auto engine stop/start, turn the vehicle off before opening the hood. If the vehicle is on, the engine will start when the hood is opened. You or others could be injured.
Components under the hood can get hot from running the engine. To help avoid the risk of burning unprotected skin, never touch these components until they have cooled, and always use a glove or towel to avoid direct skin contact.

Clear any snow from the hood before opening.

To open the hood:

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 02

  1. Pull the hood release handle inside the vehicle. It is located on the lower left side of the instrument panel.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 03
  2. Go to the front of the vehicle and move the secondary hood release lever toward the right side of the vehicle.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 04
  3. Lift the hood and release the hood prop from its retainer, above the radiator. Securely place the hood prop into the slot on the underside of the hood.

To close the hood:

  1. Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly, and all tools are removed.
  2. Lift the hood and remove the hood prop rod from the underside of the hood. Return the prop rod to its retainer. The prop rod must click into place when returning it to the retainer to prevent hood damage.
  3. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in) above the vehicle and release it so it fully latches. Check to make sure the hood is closed and repeat the process if necessary.

Warning
Do not drive the vehicle if the hood is not latched completely. The hood could open fully, block your vision, and cause a crash. You or others could be injured. Always close the hood completely before driving.

Engine Compartment Overview

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 05

1.2L L3 Engine (LIH)

  1.  Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Washer Fluid page 265.
  2.  Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System page 260.
  3. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil page 256.
  4. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View). See Cooling System page 260.
  5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil page 256.
  6. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter page 259.
  7. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes page 266.
  8. Positive (+) Battery Terminal. See Jump Starting – North America page 309.
  9. Battery – North America page 268.
  10. Engine Compartment Fuse Block page 280.
  11. Remote Negative (-) Battery Terminal. See Jump Starting – North America page 309

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 06

  1. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Washer Fluid page 265.
  2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System page 260.
  3. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil page 256.
  4. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil page 256.
  5. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View). See Cooling System page 260.
  6. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter page 259.
  7. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes page 266.
  8. Positive (+) Battery Terminal. See Jump Starting – North America page 309.
  9. Battery – North America page 268.
  10. Engine Compartment Fuse Block page  280. Remote Negative (-) Battery Terminal. See Jump Starting – North America page 309

Engine Oil

To ensure proper engine performance and long life, careful attention must be paid to engine oil. Following these simple, but important steps will help protect your investment:

  • Use engine oil approved to the proper specification and of the proper viscosity grade. See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in this section.
  • Check the engine oil level regularly and maintain the proper oil level. See “Checking Engine Oil” and “When to Add Engine Oil” in this section.
  • Change the engine oil at the appropriate time. See Engine Oil Life System page 258.

Always dispose of engine oil properly. See “What to Do with Used Oil” in this section .

Checking Engine Oil
Check the engine oil level regularly, every 650 km (400 mi), especially prior to a long trip. The engine oil dipstick handle is a loop. See Engine Compartment Overview page 253 for the location.

Warning
The engine oil dipstick handle may be hot; it could burn you. Use a towel or glove to touch the dipstick handle. If a low oil Driver Information Center (DIC) message displays, check the oil level.

Follow these guidelines:

  • To get an accurate reading, park the vehicle on level ground. Check the engine oil level after the engine has been off for at least two hours. Checking the engine oil level on steep grades or too soon after engine shutoff can result in incorrect readings. Accuracy improves when checking a cold engine prior to starting. Remove the dipstick and check the level.
  • If unable to wait two hours, the engine must be off for at least 15 minutes if the engine is warm, or at least 30 minutes if the engine is not warm. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it with a clean paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 07

L3T 1.3L L3 Engine

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 08

LIH 1.2L L3 Engine

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick and the engine has been off for at least 15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil and then recheck the level. See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” later in this section for an  explanation of what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and specification page 333.

Caution
Do not add too much oil. Oil levels above or below the acceptable operating range shown on the dipstick are harmful to the engine. If you find that you have an oil level above the operating range, i.e., the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the MAX mark, the engine could be damaged. You should drain out the excess oil or limit driving of the vehicle and seek a service professional to remove the excess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview page 253 for the location of the engine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range between the MIN and MAX marks. Push the dipstick all the way back in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Selecting the right engine oil depends on both the proper oil specification and viscosity grade. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants page 328.

Specification
Use full synthetic engine oils that meet the dexos1 specification.
Engine oils that have been approved by GM as meeting the dexos1 specification are marked with the dexos1 approved logo. See www.gmdexos.com.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 09

Caution
Failure to use the recommended engine oil or equivalent can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

Viscosity Grade
Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade engine oil. Cold Temperature Operation: In an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below −29 °C (−20 °F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be used. An oil of this viscosity grade will provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures.
When selecting an oil of the appropriate viscosity grade, it is recommended to select an oil of the correct specification. See
“Specification” earlier in this section.

When selecting an oil of the appropriate viscosity grade, it is recommended to select an oil of the correct specification. See “Specification” earlier in this section.

Engine Oil Additives/Engine Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils meeting the dexos1 specification are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal.
Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash or pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on a combination of factors which include engine revolutions, engine temperature, and miles driven. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on. Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might indicate that an oil change is not necessary for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and, at this time, the system must be reset. Your dealer has trained service people who will perform this work and reset the system. It is also important to check the oil regularly over the course of an oil drain interval and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) since the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System
Reset the system whenever the engine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next engine oil change. To reset the system:

  1. Display the REMAINING OIL LIFE on the See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) page 108 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) page 115.
  2. Press and hold CaptureBuick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 002 on the DIC while the Oil Life display is active. The oil life will change to 100%.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system has not been reset. Repeat the procedure.

Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealer and have it repaired as soon as possible. Change the fluid at the intervals listed in Maintenance Schedule page 324, and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in  Recommended Fluids and Lubricants page 328.

Caution
Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damage may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use the correct automatic transmission fluid. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants page 328.

If you need to check the transmission fluid level, take the vehicle to your dealer.

Engine Air Filter Life System
If equipped, this feature provides the engine air filter’s remaining life and best timing for a change. The timing to change an engine air filter depends on driving and environmental conditions.

When to Change Engine Air Filter
When the REPLACE AT NEXT OIL CHANGE message displays, the engine air filter should be replaced at the next engine oil change.
When the REPLACE ENGINE AIR FILTER SOON message displays, the engine air filter should be replaced at the earliest convenience. The system must be reset after the engine air filter is changed.
If the CHECK AIR FILTER SYSTEM message displays, see your dealer.

How to Reset Engine Air Filter Life System
Reset the system whenever the engine air filter is replaced so that the system can calculate the next engine air filter change.

To reset:

  1. Place the vehicle in P (Park).
    1. Select Engine Air Filter Life on the DIC menu. See Driver Information Center
      (DIC) (Base Level) 0 108 or
      Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) page 110.
  2. Press CaptureBuick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 002 or the thumbwheel to move to the Reset CaptureBuick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 002 Disable display area. Select Reset then press l or press the thumbwheel. Then press Yes to confirm the reset.
  3. 100% AIR FILTER LIFE will be displayed when the Engine Air Filter Life System is successfully reset.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview page 253.

When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/ Filter
If the vehicle is not equipped with the engine air filter life system, see Maintenance Schedule page 324 for intervals on inspecting and replacing the engine air cleaner/filter.

  • How to Inspect/Replace the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
    Do not start the engine or have the engine running with the engine air cleaner/filter housing open. Before removing the engine air cleaner/filter, make sure that the engine air cleaner/filter housing and nearby components are free of dirt and debris.
    Do not clean the engine air cleaner/filter or components with water or compressed air.

To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter:

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 10

  1. Remove the five screws and lift the cover off the air cleaner/filter housing.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 13
  2. Press a hook both sides and disassemble two hooks.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 12
  3. Disassemble the duct.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 13
  4. Remove four screws, tilt the cover, and slide it out of the assembly.
    Warning
    If part replacement is necessary, the part must be replaced with one of the same part number or with an equivalent part. Use of a replacement part without the same fit, form, and function may result in personal injury or damage to the vehicle.
  5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
    Lower the cover, slide it into the assembly, then secure with the screws.
  6. If equipped, reset the engine air filter life system after replacing the engine air filter. See Engine Air Filter Life System page 259.

See Maintenance Schedule page 324 for replacement intervals.

Warning
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when working on the engine and do not drive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Caution
If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily get into the engine, which could damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when driving.

Cooling System
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 14

1.2L L3 Engine (LIH)

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 15

1.3L L3 Engine (L3T)

  1. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)
  2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and  Pressure Cap

Warning
An underhood electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

Warning
Do not touch heater or radiator hoses, or other engine parts. They can be very hot and can burn you. Do not run the engine if there is a leak; all coolant could leak out. That could cause an engine fire and can burn you. Fix any leak before driving the vehicle.

Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever occurs first .

The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating page 264

What to Use
Warning
Plain water, or other liquids such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. With plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot but there would not be an overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else needs to be added. This mixture:

  • Gives freezing protection down to −37 °C (−34 °F), outside temperature.
  • Gives boiling protection up to 129 °C (265 °F), engine temperature.
  • Protects against rust and corrosion.
  • Will not damage aluminum  parts.
  • Helps keep the proper engine temperature

Caution
Do not use anything other than a mix of DEX-COOL coolant that meets GM Standard GMW3420 and clean, drinkable water. Anything else can cause damage to the engine cooling system and the vehicle, which would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Never dispose of engine coolant by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, or into sewers, streams, or bodies of water. Have the coolant changed by an authorized service center, familiar with legal requirements regarding used coolant disposal. This will help protect the environment and your health.

Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level .

It is normal to see coolant moving in the upper coolant hose return line when the engine is running.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 17

Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. If coolant is visible but the coolant level mark is not visible, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank to the top rib on the middle of the tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done.

If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank, add coolant as follows.

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank
Warning
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system are under pressure. Turning the pressure cap, even a little, can cause them to come out at high speed and you could be burned. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and pressure cap to cool.
Plain water, or other liquids such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. With plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot but there would not be an overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned.

Warning
Spilling coolant on hot engine parts can burn you. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.

Caution
Failure to follow the specific coolant fill procedure could cause the engine to overheat and could cause system damage. If coolant is not visible in the surge tank, contact your dealer.

If no problem is found, check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at the indicated level mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it.

Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 10

  1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will allow any pressure still left to be vented out the discharge hose.
  2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 16
  3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the indicated level mark.
  4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fan.
    By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the indicated
    level mark.
  5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.
  6. Verify coolant level after the engine is shut off and the coolant is cold.
    If necessary, repeat coolant fill procedure Steps 1–6.
    If the coolant still is not at the proper level when the system cools down again, see your dealer.

Caution
If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.

Automatic Coolant Service Fill Instruction
If equipped, this feature assists in filling and removing air from the cooling system after service of components or when coolant is added after being too low.

To activate the fill and air removal process:

  1. With a cold system, open the surge tank cap and add coolant to the indicated mark on the surge tank.
  2. Connect the vehicle to a battery charger.
  3. Turn the ignition to Service See Ignition Positions page 193.
  4. Turn off the air conditioning.
  5. Set the parking brake.
  6.  At the same time, press the accelerator and the brake for two seconds, then release.

At the end of the cycle, check the coolant level in the surge tank and add coolant if it is low. Turn off the vehicle, allow the Engine
Control Module (ECM) to go to sleep, about two minutes, and repeat Steps 3-7.
Listen for pump activation and movement of the control valves while watching the level of the coolant in the surge tank. If the tank empties, turn the ignition off, carefully remove the surge tank cap, refill to the indicated mark, and repeat Steps 4-7. The fill and air removal process will run for approximately 10 minutes.

Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of the engine overheating.

There is an engine coolant temperature gauge on the instrument cluster. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge page 97 The vehicle may also display a message on the Driver Information Center (DIC).

If the decision is made not to lift the hood when this warning appears, get service help right away. See Roadside Assistance Program page 339 .

If the decision is made to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fan is running. If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running. If it is not, do not continue to run the engine. Have the vehicle serviced.

Caution
Do not run the engine if there is a leak in the engine cooling system. This can cause a loss of all coolant and can damage the system and vehicle. Have any leaks fixed right away.

If Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment
Warning
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system are under pressure. Turning the pressure cap, even a little, can cause them to come out at high speed and you could be burned. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and pressure cap to cool.

If No Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle:

  • Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
  • Stops after high-speed driving.
  • Idles for long periods in traffic.

If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam:

  1. Turn the air conditioning off.
  2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan Open the windows as necessary.
  3. When it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral), and let the engine idle.

If the engine coolant temperature gauge is no longer in the overheated area, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle slowly for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front. If the warning does not come back on, continue to drive normally and have the cooling system checked for proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.

Washer Fluid
What to Use
When windshield washer fluid is needed, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If operating the vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 12

Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See Engine Compartment Overview page 260 for reservoir location .

Caution

  • Do not use washer fluid that contains any type of water repellent coating. This can cause the wiper blades to chatter or skip.
  • Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in the windshield washer. It can damage the windshield washer system and paint.
  • Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage the washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system.
  • When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer instructions for adding water.
  • Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.

Brakes
Disc brake linings have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake linings are worn and new linings are needed. The sound can come and go or can be heard all the time when the vehicle is moving, except when applying the brake pedal firmly.

Warning
The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to a crash. When the brake wear warning sound is heard, have the vehicle serviced.

Caution
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake linings could result in costly brake repairs.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied, clearing up following several applications. This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake linings for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications. See Capacities and Specifications page 333.

Brake pads should be replaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts
Always replace brake system parts with new, approved replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes may not work properly. The braking performance can change in many ways if the wrong brake parts are installed or if parts are improperly installed.

Brake Pad Life System
When to Change Brake Pads
If equipped, this system estimates the remaining life of the front and rear brake pads. Brake pad life is displayed in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), along with a percentage for each axle. The system must be reset every time the brake pads are changed.
When the system has determined that the brake pads need to be replaced, a message will display.
Brake pads should always be replaced as complete axle sets.

How to Reset the Brake Pad Life System
When the ignition is turned on after new pads and wear sensors are installed, a message will display. Follow the prompts to reset the system.
The brake pad life system can also be manually reset:

  1. Display Brake Pad Life on the DIC. See
    Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 108 or
    Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 110.
  2. Press and hold l or the thumbwheel.
    Select front or rear pads as appropriate.
  3. Select YES on the confirmation message.
  4. Repeat for pads on the other axle if they were also replaced.

How to Disable the Brake Pad Life System
The brake pad life system can be turned off.
This may be necessary if aftermarket brake pads without wear sensors are installed.
When the system is turned off, the front and rear brake pad life percentages will not display. However, the built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn can still determine when the pads should be replaced. See Brakes page 266.

To turn off the brake pad life system:

  1. Display Brake Pad Life on the DIC. See
    Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) page 108 or
    Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) page 110.
  2. Select DISABLE
    To turn the brake pad life system back on,  follow the above steps but select ENABLE in Step 2.

Brake Fluid

Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 13

The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with GM approved DOT 4 brake fluid as indicated on the reservoir cap. See Engine Compartment Overview page 253 for the location of the reservoir.

Checking Brake Fluid
With the vehicle in P (Park) on a level surface, the brake fluid level should be between the minimum and maximum marks on the brake fluid reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir may go down:

  • Normal brake lining wear. When new linings are installed, the fluid level goes back up.
  • A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system. Have the brake hydraulic system fixed.
  • With a leak, the brakes will not work well.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it.

Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are  installed. Add or remove fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic  system .

Warning
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and the vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning Light page 102 .

Brake fluid absorbs water over time which degrades the effectiveness of the brake fluid. Replace brake fluid at the specified intervals to prevent increased stopping distance. See Maintenance Schedule page 324.

What to Add
Use only GM approved DOT 4 brake fluid from a clean, sealed container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants page 328.

Warning
The wrong or contaminated brake fluid could result in damage to the brake system. This could result in the loss of braking leading to a possible injury. Always use the proper GM approved brake fluid.

Caution
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Immediately wash off any painted surface.

Battery – North America
The original equipment battery is maintenance free. Do not remove the cap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement number on the original battery label when a new battery is needed. For replacement of the battery, see your dealer.

The vehicle has an Absorbent Glass Mat (AGM) 12-volt battery. Installation of a standard 12-volt battery will result in reduced 12-volt battery life.

When using a 12-volt battery charger on the 12-volt AGM battery, some chargers have an AGM battery setting on the charger.
If available, use the AGM setting on the charger, to limit charge voltage to 14.8 volts.

Warning
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories can expose you to chemicals including lead and lead compounds, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

See California Proposition 65 Warning page 1.

Vehicle Storage
Warning
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not careful. Always wear eye protection. See Jump Starting – North America page 309 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery to keep the battery from running down.

Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.

Negative Battery Cable Disconnection
Warning
Before disconnecting the negative battery cable, turn off all features, turn the ignition off, and remove the key,
if equipped, from the vehicle. If this is not done, you or others could be injured, and the vehicle could be damaged.

Caution
If the battery is disconnected with the ignition on or the vehicle in Retained Accessory Power (RAP), the OnStar back-up battery will be permanently discharged and will need to be replaced.

  1. Make sure the lamps, features, and accessories are turned off.
  2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key, if equipped.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 18
  3. Loosen the negative battery cable nut (1).
  4. Remove the negative battery cable (2) from the battery.

Negative Battery Cable Reconnection
Caution
When reconnecting the battery:

  • Use the original nut from the vehicle to secure the negative battery cable. Do not use a different nut. If you need a replacement nut, see your dealer.
  • Tighten the nut with a hand tool. Do not use an impact wrench or power tools to tighten the nut.

The vehicle could be damaged if these guidelines are not followed.

Caution
Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on the nut that secures the negative battery cable to the vehicle. This could damage the vehicle.

  1. Install the negative battery cable (2) to the battery.
  2. Install the negative battery cable nut (1) and tighten.
  3. Turn the ignition on.

All-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case
Under normal driving conditions, transfer case fluid does not require maintenance unless there is a fluid leak or unusual noise. If required, have the transfer case serviced by your dealer.

Automatic Transmission Shift Lock  Control Function Check
Warning
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.

  1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle.
    It should be parked on a level surface.
  2. Apply the parking brake. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
  3. With the engine off, turn the ignition on, but do not start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer for service.

Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check
Warning
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake.

  • To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the engine running and the transmission in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
  • To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake.

Contact your dealer if service is required.

Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear and cracking. See Maintenance Schedule page 324.

Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For proper type and length, see Maintenance Replacement Parts page 324

Caution
Allowing the wiper arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not allow the wiper arm to touch the windshield.

Front Wiper Blade Replacement

To replace the front wiper blades:

  1. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from the windshield.
    Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 14
  2. Press the release button on the top side of the wiper and pull the wiper blade out of the end of the wiper arm.
  3. Install the wiper blade connector by sliding it into the end of the wiper arm until the button on the wiper blade clicks into place.
  4. Place the wiper arm and wiper blade back on the windshield.

Caution
Damage may occur if the wiper blades are not in contact with the windshield before turning on the wiper system.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 20

  1. Lift the wiper arm away from the rear windshield.
  2. Push the wiper blade away from the wiper arm.
  3. Once the blade pin disengages from the wiper arm, remove the wiper blade by sliding the blade off the arm.
  4. Reverse Steps 1–3 to install a new wiper blade.

Windshield Replacement
Driver Assistance Systems

When a windshield replacement is needed and the vehicle is equipped with a front-looking camera sensor for the Driver Assistance Systems, the windshield must be installed according to GM specifications for these systems to work properly. If it is not, there may be unexpected behavior and/or messages from these systems.

Gas Strut(s)
Your vehicle may be equipped with gas strut(s) to provide assistance in lifting and holding open the hood/trunk/liftgate system in full open position.

Warning
If the gas struts that hold open the hood, trunk, and/or liftgate fail, you or others could be seriously injured. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service immediately. Visually inspect the gas struts for signs of wear, cracks, or other damage periodically. Check to make sure the hood/trunk/liftgate is held open with enough force. If struts are failing to hold the hood/trunk/liftgate, do not operate. Have the vehicle serviced.

Caution
Do not apply tape or hang any objects from gas struts. Also do not push down or pull on gas struts. This may cause damage to the vehicle.

See Maintenance Schedule page 324.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 21

Hood

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 22

Trunk

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 23

Liftgate

Headlamp Aiming

Front Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim h as been preset and should need no further adjustment.
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the headlamp aim may be affected.
If adjustment to the headlamps is necessary, see your dealer.

Bulb Replacement

For the proper type of replacement bulbs, or any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer.

Caution
Do not replace incandescent bulbs with aftermarket LED replacement bulbs. This can cause damage to the vehicle electrical system.

This vehicle may be equipped with desiccant to reduce fogging inside the headlamp due to moisture. If fogging continues for a long time, see your dealer for service.

Halogen Bulbs
Warning
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside  and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.

LED Lighting
This vehicle has several LED lamps. For replacement of any LED lighting assembly, contact your dealer.

Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps
Base Level Headlamp Assembly The base model vehicle has halogen high-beam and low-beam headlamps, an LED turn signal lamp, and a DRL and parking lamp on the headlamp assembly.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 24

Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

  1. Low-Beam Headlamp
  2. High-Beam Headlamp

High-Beam Headlamp/Low-Beam Headlamp

  1. Open the hood. See Hood page 251.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 25
  2. Remove the headlamp bulb access cover.
  3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and pull straight back.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 26
  4. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the bulb.
  5. Install the new bulb in the headlamp assembly by turning clockwise.
  6. Reconnect the wiring harness connector.
  7.  Install the headlamp bulb access cover.

Uplevel Headlamp Assembly
The uplevel model vehicle has LED

high-beam and low-beam headlamps, a DRL and parking lamp, and a DRL position lamp on the headlamp assembly.

Sidemarker

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 27

The vehicle has an LED sidemarker lamp.

Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps
Front Turn Signal Lamp

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 28

Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

  1. Tilt the wheel and remove the screws on the outside of the wheel liner.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 29
  2. Bend the wheel liner back to make enough space for hand access.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual74
  3. While holding the wheel liner with one hand and disengage the bulb socket from the plug connector by pulling the retaining rib.
  4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it from the reflector using the other hand.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 31
  5. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket and replace with a new bulb.
  6. Insert the bulb socket into the reflector by turning clockwise and attach the plug connector.
    Reassemble the lower cover and front wheel liner.

Front Fog Lamp
The vehicle has LED fog lamp Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stop lamps, and Back-Up Lamps (Base Level)
Caution
Improper lamp assembly removal and installation can cause leaks and water intrusion which may cause damage to the taillamp. Do not remove the taillamp assembly to replace a bulb. Use the tailgate opening to access the bulb.

Tailgate inboard Taillamp

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 32
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

  1. Taillamp
  2. Taillamp
  3. Remove the bulb access door on tailgate.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual75
  4. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket and replace with a new bulb.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual76
  5. Insert the bulb socket and attach the plug connector.
  6. Reassemble the cover.

Stop lamp/Taillamp, Turn Signal, and Sidemarker Lamp

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 35

Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

  1. Stop lamp/Taillamp
  2. Turn signal lamp
  3. Remove and retain both screws attaching the taillamp assembly to the vehicle body.
  4. Pull the taillamp assembly straight back to detach it from the vehicle body. Take care that the cable duct remains in place.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 34
  5. Remove the bulb socket from the taillamp assembly.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 35
  6. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket by pulling it straight out.
  7.  Insert a new bulb into the bulb socket.
  8. Install the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly.
  9. Install the taillamp assembly to the vehicle body with the two screws.

Rear Back-Up Lamp

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 36

The bulbs are accessible from the underside
of the vehicle.

  1. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and remove it from reflector.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 39
  2. Disengage the bulb socket from the plug connector by pressing the retaining lug.
  3. Remove and replace the bulb socket with bulb and attach the plug connector.
  4. Insert the bulb socket into the reflector and turn clockwise to engage.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps (Uplevel)
Caution
Improper lamp assembly removal and installation can cause leaks and water intrusion which may cause damage to the taillamp. Do not remove the taillamp assembly to replace a bulb. Use the tailgate opening to access the bulb.
The stoplamp/taillamp/turn signal lamp/side marker lamp and tailgate inboard taillamp are LEDs. To replace, see your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical System Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit breakers to protect against an electrical system overload.

When the current electrical load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the current load returns to normal or the problem is fixed. This greatly reduces the chance of circuit overload and fire caused by electrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protect power devices in the vehicle.

If there is a problem on the road and a fuse needs to be replaced, the same amperage fuse can be borrowed. Choose some feature of the vehicle that is not needed to use and replace it as soon as possible.

To check a fuse, look at the band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure to replace a bad fuse with a fuse of the identical size and rating .

Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 29 Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 30

Replacing a Blown Fuse

  1. Turn off the vehicle .
  2. Locate the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse block .
    Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 31Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual33
  3. Use the fuse puller to remove the fuse from the top or side, as shown above.
  4. If the fuse must be replaced immediately, borrow a replacement fuse with the same amperage from the fuse block. Choose a vehicle feature that is not needed to safely operate the Repeat Steps 2-3.
  5. Insert the replacement fuse into the empty slot of the blown fuse.

At the next opportunity, see your dealer to replace the blown fuse.

Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. Have the headlamp wiring checked right away if the lamps go on and off or remain off.

Windshield Wipers
If the wiper motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice, the windshield wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart.

Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload due to heavy snow or ice may cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using the windshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by an electrical problem and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of damage caused by electrical problems.

Danger
Fuses and circuit breakers are marked with their ampere rating. Do not exceed the specified amperage rating when replacing fuses and circuit breakers. Use of an oversized fuse or circuit breaker can result in a vehicle fire. You and others could be seriously injured or killed.

Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual34

Warning
Installation or use of fuses that do not meet GM’s original fuse specifications is dangerous. The fuses could fail, and result in a fire. You or others could be injured or killed, and the vehicle could be damaged.

See Accessories and Modifications page 250 and General Information page 250.
To check or replace a blown fuse, see Electrical System Overload page 278.

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 44

To remove the fuse block cover, squeeze the clip and lift it up.

Caution
Spilling liquid on any electrical component on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component.

To remove fuses, use the fuse puller and pull straight out.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 45

The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown.

Micro Fuses Usage
F02 CLSTR
F03 N/A
F06 OSRVM DEFOG
F07 L/GATE RELSE
F08 AHL AFL MTR1
F09 VENT SEAT
F10 N/A
F11 AHL AFL MTR2
F12 N/A
F14 ISRVM REAR VIEW CAMERA
F15 DEFC MDL RUN/CRNK
F16 HDLP LVL
F17 N/A-DSL
F18 FTZM
F19 N/A
F20 N/A
F22 TRLR ST/TRN LT – TRLR
F24 ESCL
Micro Fuses Usage
F25 ECM TCM RUN/CRNK
F26 FRT/REAR WSW PUMP
F27 IGN COIL-GAS ECM PT3-DSL
F28 AERO SH
F29 AHL AFL MDL
F31 ECM PT2
F32 ENG COMP2
F33 RVC
F34 FRT FOG LP
F35 ENG COMP1
F36 ECM PT1
F38 TRLR PRK LAMP – TRLR
F40 AUX WATER PUMP
F41 REAR WPR
F42 HORN
F44 REAR WPR PRK
F45 A/C CLTCH
F46 N/A
Micro Fuses Usage
F47 ECM BATT-GAS ECM BATT-DSL
F49 HDLP HI LH
F50 N/A
F51 HDLP HI RH
F52 NOX SOOT SNSR -DSL TRLR ST/TRN RT – TRLR
F53 N/A
F54 PEPS
F56 CNSTR VENT SOL-GAS/DEFC MDL-DSL
F57 DEFC MDL-DSL
F58 TCM BATT
Spare Fuses Usage
SF06 SPARE
ET Fuses Usage
F48 GLOW PLUG
J-Case Fuses Usage
F01 N/A
F05 N/A
F13 REAR WNDW DEFOG
F21 E-BOOST PWR1
F23 STRTR PINION
F59 N/A
F62 FUEL HTR DSL
F63 N/A
M-case Fuses Usage
F04 FRT WPR
F30 STRTR SOL
F37 AUX OIL PUMP
F39 N/A
M-case Fuses Usage
F43 PWR WNDW RT
F55 PWR WNDW LT
F60 DEF HTR
F61 N/A
Mini Relays Usage
K03 RUN/CRNK
K04 REAR DEFOG
K06 STRTR PINION
K08 PT RLY
K09 FUEL HTR DSL
HC Micro Relays  

Usage

K01 N/A
K02 N/A
K05 STRTR SOL
K07 A/C CNTRL
K10 N/A
Ultra Micro Relays  

Usage

K11 N/A

Type 2 Fuse Block

Micro Fuses Usage
F02 CLSTR
F03 N/A
F06 OSRVM DEFOG
F07 L/GATE RELSE
F08 N/A
F09 VENT SEAT
F10 N/A
F11 N/A
F12 N/A
F14 ISRVM REAR VIEW CAMERA
F15 N/A
F16 HDLP LVL
F17 N/A
F18 FTZM
F19 N/A
Micro Fuses Usage
F20 N/A
F22 TRLR ST/TRN LT – TRLR
F24 ESCL
F25 ECM TCM RUN/CRNK
F26 FRT/REAR WSW PUMP
F27 IGN COIL-GAS
F28 AERO SH
F29 AHL AFL MDL
F31 ECM PT2
F32 ENG COMP2
F33 RVC
F34 FRT FOG LP
F35 ENG COMP1
F36 ECM PT1
F38 TRLR PRK LAMP – TRLR
F40 N/A
F41 REAR WPR
F42 HORN
F44 REAR WPR PRK
Micro Fuses Usage
F45 A/C CLTCH
F46 N/A
F47 ECM BATT-GAS
F49 HDLP HI LH
F50 N/A
F51 HDLP HI RH
F52 TRLR ST/TRN RT – TRLR
F53 AUX WATER PUMP
F54 PEPS
F56 CNSTR VENT SOL-GAS/DEFC
F57 N/A
F58 TCM BATT
Spare Fuses Usage
SF01 SPARE
SF02 SPARE
SF03 SPARE
SF04 SPARE
SF05 SPARE
Spare Fuses Usage
SF06 SPARE
ET Fuses Usage
F48 N/A
J-Case Fuses Usage
F01 N/A
F05 N/A
F13 REAR WNDW DEFOG
F21 E-BOOST PWR1
F23 STRTR PINION
F59 N/A
F62 N/A
F63 N/A
M-Case Fuses Usage
F04 FRT WPR
F30 STRTR SOL
F37 AUX OIL PUMP
F39 N/A
M-Case Fuses Usage
F43 PWR WNDW RT
F55 PWR WNDW LT
F60 N/A
F61 N/A
Mini Relays Usage
K03 RUN/CRNK
K04 REAR DEFOG
K06 STRTR PINION
K08 PT RLY
K09 N/A
HC Micro Relays  

Usage

K01 N/A
K02 N/A
K05 STRTR SOL
K07 A/C CNTRL
K10 N/A
Ultra Micro Relays  

Usage

K11 N/A

Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 46

The instrument panel fuse block is on the underside of the driver side instrument panel. To access the fuses, open the fuse cover by pulling out. To reinstall the cover, insert the top tab first, then push the cover back into its original location.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 47

Fuse Usage
F01 LUMBAR
F02 SUNROOF
Fuse Usage
F03 VBAT_3
F04 VBAT_7
F05 VBAT_6
F06 AUTO HVAC
F07 CGM
F08 ST_WHL_HTR
F09 DISPLAY
F10 RADIO
F11 ONSTAR (ERA)
F12 PARK_ASSIST
F13 MAN. HVAC
F14 WL CHARGER
F15 VBAT_2
F16 VBAT_1
F17 SWC BKLT
F18 N/A
F19 N/A
F20 CLOCK SPRING
F21 OCC SEN
Fuse Usage
F22 DLC
F23 SDM
F24 IGN_SW/ESCL
F25 PWR L-GATE MDL
F26 SEC FUSE-2
F27 PWR SEAT CO-DR
F28 VBAT_8
F29 DC-DC AT
F30 PWR L-GATE MDL
F31 OSRVM
F32 FRT HS PWR-1
F33 VBAT_4
F34 FRT HS PWR-2
F35 AMPLIFIER
F36 ONSTAR (TCP)
F37 PWR SEAT DR
F38 DC-DC_400W
F39 SEC FUSE-1
F40 HVAC_BLOWER
Circuit Breaker  

Usage

CB1 N/A
CB2 APO
Relay Usage
K01 i-RAP_ACC
K02 RUN
K03 LOGISTICS
K04 N/A
K05 N/A
K06 N/A

Rear Compartment Fuse Block

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 48

The rear compartment fuse block is behind a cover on the driver side of the rear] compartment. To access the fuses, remove the cover.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 49

Fuse Usage
F01 N/A
F02 RDCM ELEC
Fuse Usage
F03 N/A
F04 N/A
F05 DC/AC INVERTER
F06 N/A
F07 RDCM
F08 RR SEAT HEAT PWR1
F09 N/A
F10 RR SEAT HEAT PWR2
F11 N/A
F12 N/A
F13 N/A
F14 N/A
F15 N/A
F16 N/A
F17 N/A
F18 N/A
F19 N/A
F20 N/A
F21 N/A
Circuit Breakers  

Usage

CB1 N/A
Relays Usage
K01 N/A
K02 N/A
K03 N/A
K04 N/A
K05 N/A

Wheels and Tires

Tires
Every new GM vehicle has high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. See the warranty manual for information regarding the tire  warranty and where to get service. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer.

Warning

  • Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.
  • Overloading the tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. There could be a blowout and a serious crash. See Vehicle Load Limits page 190.
  • Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting crash could cause serious Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when the tires are cold.
  • Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden impact — such as when hitting a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
  • Worn or old tires can cause a crash. If the tread is badly worn, replace them.
  • Replace any tires that have been damaged by impacts with potholes, curbs, etc.
  • Improperly repaired tires can cause a crash. Only your dealer or an authorized tire service center should repair, replace, dismount, and mount the tires.
  • Do not spin the tires in excess of 56 km/h (35 mph) on slippery surfaces such as snow, mud, ice, Excessive spinning may cause the tires to explode.

All-Season Tires
This vehicle may come with all-season tires These tires are designed to provide good overall performance on most road surfaces  and weather conditions. Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. Original equipment all-season tires can be identified by the last two characters of this TPC code, which will be “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on snow or ice-covered roads is expected. All-season tires provide adequate performance for most winter driving conditions, but they may not offer the same level of traction or performance as winter tires on snow or ice-covered roads. See Winter Tires page 288.

Winter Tires
This vehicle was  not originally equipped with winter tires. Winter tires are designed for increased traction on snow and ice-covered roads. Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on ice or snow covered roads is expected. See your dealer for details regarding winter tire availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying New Tires page 299

With winter tires, there may be decreased dry road traction, increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After changing to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking.

If using winter tires:

  • Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all four wheel positions.
  • Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range, and speed rating as the original equipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If winter tires with a lower speed rating are chosen, never exceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.

Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall. The examples show a typical passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.

Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 43

Passenger Tire Example

  1. Tire Size : The tire size is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration in this section.
  2. TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines.
    • DOT (Department of Transportation) : The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
  3. DOT Tire Date of Manufacture : The last four digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufactured date. The first two digits represent the week and the last two digits, the year. For example, the third week of the year 2020 would have a 4-digit DOT date of 0320. Week 01 is the first full week (Sunday through Saturday) of each year.
  4. Tire Identification Number (TIN) :
    The letters and numbers following the DOT (Department of Transportation) code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture.
  5. Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
  6. Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) : Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: tread wear, traction, and temperature resistance. For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading page 301.

Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 43

Compact Spare Tire Example

  1. Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
  • Temporary Use Only : The compact spare tire or temporary use tire should not be driven at speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). The compact spare tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If the vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire page 308 and If a Tire Goes Flat page 303.
    1. Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The letters and numbers following the DOT (Department of Transportation) code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture.
    2. Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load.
    3. Tire Inflation : The temporary use tire or compact spare tire should be inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi). For more information on tire pressure and inflation see Tire Pressure page 292
    4. Tire Size : A combination of letters and numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. The letter “T” as the first character in the tire size means the tire is for temporary use only.
    5. TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines.

Tire Designations
Tire Size

The example shows a typical passenger vehicle tire size.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 52

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

  • Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
  • Tire Width : The 3-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
  • Aspect Ratio : A 2-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item (3) of the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide.
    • Construction Code : A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter “R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction .
    • Rim Diameter : Diameter of the wheel in inches.
    • Service Description : These characters represent the load index and speed rating of the tire. The load index represents the load carrying capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.
  • Belt : A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
    Bead : The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
    Bias Play Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
    Cold Tire Pressure : The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in kPa (kilopascal) or psi (pounds per square inch) before a tire has built up heat from driving. See Tire Pressure page 292.
    DOT Markings : A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date of production.
    GVWR : Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits page 190 .
  • GAWR FRT : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle. See Vehicle Load Limits page 190.
  • GAWR RR : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle. See Vehicle Load Limits page 190.Intended Outboard Sidewall : The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.Kilopascal (kPa) : The metric unit for air pressure.Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.Load Index : An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure : The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.Maximum Load Rating : The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.Occupant Distribution : Designated seating positions.

    Outward Facing Sidewall : The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire.

    Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.

    Recommended Inflation Pressure : Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. See Tire Pressure page 92 and Vehicle Load Limits page 190.

  • Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
    Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.
    Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.
    Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.
  • Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided.
    Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.
  • Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires page 298 UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings  for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality Grading page 301.Vehicle Capacity Weight : The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated cargo load. See Vehicle Load Limits page 190.Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire : Load on an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.Vehicle Placard : A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information Label” under Vehicle Load Limits page 190.Tire Pressure
    Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively.

Warning
Neither tire underinflation nor overinflation is good. Underinflated tires, or tires that do not have enough air, can result in:

  • Tire overloading and overheating, which could lead to a blowout
  • Premature or irregular wear
  • Poor handling
  • Reduced fuel economy for internal combustion engine vehicles
  • Reduced range for electric vehicles
  • Overinflated tires, or tires that have too much air, can result in:
  • Unusual wear
  • Poor handling
  • Rough ride
  • Needless damage from road hazards

The Tire and Loading Information label on the vehicle indicates the original equipment tires and the correct cold tire inflation pressures. The recommended pressure is the minimum air pressure needed to support the vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity. See Vehicle Load Limits page 190.

How the vehicle is loaded affects vehicle handling and ride comfort. Never load the vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.

When to Check
Check the pressure of the tires once a month or more. Do not forget the spare, if the vehicle has one. The compact spare cold tire pressure should be at 420 kPa (60 psi). See Compact Spare Tire page 308.

How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Proper tire inflation cannot be determined by looking at the tire. Check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold, meaning the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or no more than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until the recommended pressure is reached. If the inflation pressure is high, press on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve to release air.

Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on the valve stems to keep out dirt and moisture. Use only valve caps designed for the vehicle by GM. TPMS sensors could be damaged and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces energy efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation page 294.
See Radio Frequency Statement page 344.

Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the tires and transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual46

When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument cluster. If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits page 190.

A message to check the pressure in a specific tire displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC). The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed. For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) page 108 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) page 110.

The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as the vehicle is driven. This could be an early indicator that the air pressure is getting low and  needs to be inflated to the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your vehicle, shows the size of the original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for the tires when they are cold. See Vehicle Load Limits page 196, for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location. Also see Tire Pressure page 292.

The TPMS can warn about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection page 297, Tire Rotation page 297, and Tires page 287.

Caution
Tire sealant materials are not all the same. A non-approved tire sealant could damage the TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use only the GM approved tire sealant available through your dealer or included in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the system detects a malfunction, the low tire pressure warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message also displays. The malfunction light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can cause these to come on are:

  • One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and DIC message should go off after the road tire is replaced and the sensor matching process is performed See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this section.
  • The TPMS sensor matching process was not done or not completed successfully after rotating the tires. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off after successfully completing the sensor matching See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this section.
  • One or more TPMS sensors are missing or The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See your dealer for service.

Replacement tires or wheels do not match the original equipment tires or wheels.

Tires and wheels other than those recommended could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. See Buying New Tires page 299.

  • Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning properly it cannot detect or signal a low tire pressure condition. See your dealer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message come on and stay on.

Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)
This feature provides visual and audible alerts outside the vehicle to help when inflating an underinflated tire to the recommended cold tire pressure.

When the low tire pressure warning light comes on:

  1. Park the vehicle in a safe, level place.
  2. Set the parking brake firmly .
  3. Place the vehicle in P (Park).
  4. Add air to the tire that is underinflated. The turn signal lamp will flash.

When the recommended pressure is reached, the horn sounds once and the turn signal lamp will stop flashing and briefly turn solid.

Repeat these steps for all underinflated tires that have illuminated the low tire pressure warning light.

Warning
Overinflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture and you or others could be injured. Do not exceed the maximum pressure listed on the tire sidewall. See Tire Sidewall Labeling page 288 and Vehicle Load Limits page 190.

If the tire is overinflated by more than 35 kPa (5 psi), the horn will sound multiple times and the turn signal lamp will continue to flash for several seconds after filling stops. To release and correct the pressure, while the turn signal lamp is still flashing, briefly press the center of the valve stem. When the recommended pressure is reached, the horn sounds once.

If the turn signal lamp does not flash within 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, the tire fill alert has not been activated or is not working.

If the hazard warning flashers are on, the tire fill alert visual feedback will not work properly.

The TPMS will not activate the tire fill alert properly under the following conditions:

  • There is interference from an external device or transmitter.
  • The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire.
  • There is a malfunction in the TPMS .
  • There is a malfunction in the horn or turn signal lamps.
  • The identification code of the TPMS sensor is not registered to the system.
  • The battery of the TPMS sensor is low.

If the tire fill alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 1 m (3 ft) back or forward and try again.

If the tire fill alert feature is not working, use a tire pressure gauge.

TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. The identification code needs to be matched to a new tire/wheel position after rotating the vehicle’s tires or replacing one or more of the TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor matching process should also be performed after replacing a spare tire with a road tire containing the TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off at the next ignition cycle. The sensors are matched to the tire/ wheel positions, using a TPMS relearn tool, in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear. See your dealer for service or to purchase a relearn tool.

A TPMS relearn tool can also be purchased. See Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor Activation Tool at www.gmtoolsandequipment.com or call 1-800-GM TOOLS (1-800-468-6657).

There are two minutes to match the first tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall to match all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer, the matching process stops and must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matching process is:

  1. Set the parking brake.
  2. Turn the ignition on without starting the vehicle or place the vehicle in Service Mode. See Ignition Positions 0 193.
  3. Use SELECT or  CaptureBuick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 001to select the Vehicle in the Base Level Driver Information Center (DIC). Or Use SELECT or  CaptureBuick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 001 to select the Info page in the Uplevel Driver Information Center (DIC).
  4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the Tire Pressure Learn Menu Item (Base DIC) or the Tire Pressure Menu Item screen (Uplevel DIC).
  5. Press and hold Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 002 the thumbwheel to begin the sensor matching process.
    A message requesting acceptance of the process may display.
  6. If requested, press Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 002 or the thumbwheel again to confirm the selection. The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and the TIRE LEARN or TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen.
  7. Start with the driver side front tire.
  8. Place the relearn tool against the tire sidewall, near the valve stem. Then press the button to activate the TPMS sensor. A horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position.
  9. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 8.
  10. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 8.
  11. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 8. The horn sounds two times to indicate the sensor identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active. The TIRE LEARN or TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off.
  12. Turn the vehicle off.
  13. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label.

Tire Inspection
We recommend that the tires, including the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, be inspected for signs of wear or damage at least once a month.

Replace the tire if:

  • The indicators at three or more places around the tire can be seen.
  • There is cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber.
  • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
  • The tire has a bump, bulge, or other  damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.
  • Tire Rotation
    Tires should be rotated according to the interval specified in the Maintenance Schedule. See Maintenance Schedule page 324.

Tires are rotated to achieve a more uniform wear for all tires. The first rotation is the most important.

Anytime unusual wear is noticed, rotate the tires as soon as possible, check for proper tire inflation pressure, and check for damaged tires or wheels. If the unusual wear continues after the rotation, check the wheel alignment.

See When It Is Time for New Tires page 298 and Wheel Replacement page 302.

Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 47

Use this rotation pattern when rotating the tires.

Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires to the recommended inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label after the tires have been rotated. See Tire Pressure page 292 and Vehicle Load Limits page 190.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation page 293.

Check that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications page 333, and “Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire” under Tire Changing page 304.

Warning
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can cause wheel nuts to become loose over time. The wheel could come off and cause a crash. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the inner diameter of the wheel hub opening with wheel bearing grease after a wheel change or tire rotation to prevent corrosion or rust buildup.

Warning
Do not apply grease to the wheel mounting surface, wheel conical seats, or the wheel nuts or bolts. Grease applied to these areas could cause a wheel to become loose or come off, resulting in a crash.

When It Is Time for New Tires
Factors, such as maintenance, temperatures, driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions affect the wear rate of the tires.

Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual47

Treadwear indicators are one way to tell when it is time for new tires. Treadwear indicators appear when the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) or less of tread remaining. See Tire Inspection page 297. an Tire Rotation page 297.

The rubber in tires ages over time. This also applies to the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, even if it is never used. Multiple factors including temperatures, loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance affect how fast aging takes place. GM recommends that tires, including the spare if equipped, be replaced after six years, regardless of tread wear. To identify the age of a tire, use the tire manufacture date, which is the last four digits of the DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN) molded into one side of the tire sidewall. The last four digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufactured date. The first two digits represent the week and the last two digits, the year. For example, the third week of the year 2020 would have a digit DOT date of 0320. Week 01 is the first full week (Sunday through Saturday) of each year.

Vehicle Storage
Tires age when stored normally mounted on a parked vehicle. Park a vehicle that will be stored for at least a month in a cool, dry, clean area away from direct sunlight to slow  aging. This area should be free of grease, gasoline, or other substances that can deteriorate rubber.

Parking for an extended period can cause flat spots on the tires that may result in vibrations while driving. When storing a vehicle for at least a month, remove the tires or raise the vehicle to reduce the weight from the tires.

Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for the vehicle. The original equipment tires installed were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. When replacement tires are needed, GM strongly recommends buying tires with the same TPC Spec rating.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of the vehicle, including brake system performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire pressure monitoring performance. GM’s

TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will be followed by MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling page 288  for additional information.

GM recommends replacing worn tires in complete sets of four. Uniform tread depth on all tires will help to maintain the performance of the vehicle. Braking and handling performance may be adversely affected if all the tires are not replaced at the same time. If proper rotation and maintenance have been done, all four tires should wear out at about the same time. However, if it is necessary to replace only one axle set of worn tires, place the new tires on the rear axle. See Tire Rotation page 297.

Warning
Tires could explode during improper service. Attempting to mount or dismount a tire could cause injury or death. Only your dealer or authorized tire service center should mount or dismount the tires.

Warning
Mixing tires of different sizes (other than those originally installed on the vehicle), brands, tread patterns, or types may cause loss of vehicle control, resulting in a crash or other vehicle damage. Use the correct size, brand, and type of tire on all wheels.

Warning
Using bias-ply tires on the vehicle may cause the wheel rim flanges to develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly and cause a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. Never exceed the winter tires’ maximum speed capability when using winter tires with a lower speed rating.

If the vehicle tires must be replaced with a tire that does not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction (radial) as the original tires.

The Tire and Loading Information label indicates the original equipment tires on the vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits .

Different Size Tires and Wheels
If wheels or tires are installed that are a different size than the original equipment wheels and tires, vehicle performance, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover may be affected. If the vehicle has electronic systems such as antilock brakes, rollover airbags, traction control, electronic stability control, or All-Wheel Drive, the performance of these systems can also be affected .

Warning
If different sized wheels are used, there may not be an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. This increases the chance of a crash and serious injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for the vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires page  299 and Accessories and Modifications page 250.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and temperature performance. This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires.

The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, winter tires, compact spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements In Addition To These Grades.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels were aligned and balanced at the factory to provide the longest tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing are not necessary on a regular basis. Consider an alignment check if there is unusual tire wear or the vehicle is significantly pulling to one side or the other. Some slight pull to the left or right, depending on the crown of the road and/or other road surface variations such as troughs or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum wheels can be repaired. See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels were aligned and balanced at the factory to provide the longest tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing are not necessary on a regular basis. Consider an alignment check if there is unusual tire wear or the vehicle is significantly pulling to one side or the other. Some slight pull to the left or right, depending on the crown of the road and/or other road surface variations such as troughs or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum wheels can be repaired. See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of wheel that is needed.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors with new GM original equipment parts .

Warning
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of the vehicle. Tires can lose air and cause loss of control, resulting in a crash. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.

Replacing a wheel with a used one is dangerous. How it has been used or how far it has been driven may be unknown.

It could fail suddenly and cause a crash. When replacing wheels, use a new GM original equipment wheel.

Caution
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.

Tire Chains
Warning
If the vehicle has a tire size other than 255/65R18, do not use tire chains. There is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause loss of control and a crash. Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for the vehicle’s tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To avoid vehicle damage, drive slow and readjust or remove the traction device if it contacts the vehicle. Do not spin the wheels. If traction devices are used, install them on the front tires.

Caution
If the vehicle is equipped with 255/65R18 size tires, use tire chains only where legal and only when necessary. Use low profile chains that add no more than 12 mm thickness to the tire tread and inner sidewall. Use chains that are the proper size for the tires. Install them on the tires of the front axle. Do not use chains on the tires of the rear axle. Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions.
If the chains contact the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage the vehicle.

If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while driving, especially if the tires are maintained properly. See Tires page 285. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if there is ever a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction as used in a skid. Stop pressing the accelerator pedal and steer to straighten the vehicle. It may be very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.

Warning
Driving on a flat tire will cause permanent damage to the tire.
Re-inflating a tire after it has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat may cause a blowout and a serious crash. Never attempt to re-inflate a tire that has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat. Have your dealer or an authorized tire service center repair or replace the flat tire as soon as possible.

Warning
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place, well off the road, if possible. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

If your vehicle is loaded at or near maximum cargo capacity, it may be difficult to fit the jack under the vehicle due to the environment (shoulder slope, road debris, etc.). Removal of some weight may improve the ability to fit the jack under the vehicle at the correct jacking location.

Warning
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall causing injury or death. Find a level place to change the tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

  1. Set the parking brake firmly.
    ‘Put the vehicle in P (Park).
  2. Turn the vehicle off and do not restart the vehicle while it is raised.
  3. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle.
  4. Place wheel blocks, if equipped, on both sides of the tire at the opposite corner of the tire being changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2), use the following example as a guide to assist in the placement of the wheel blocks (1), if equipped.

Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual48

  1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)
  2. Flat Tire

The following information explains how to repair or change a tire.

Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
To access the spare tire and tools:

  1. Open the liftgate.
  2. Lift the load floor.
  3. Remove the cargo management system.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 56

Without Subwoofer

  1. Tow Eye
  2.  Jack
  3. Wrench
  4. Strap
  5. Funnel

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 57

With Subwoofer

  1. Tow Eye
  2. Wrench
  3. Jack
  4. Strap
  5. Wing Nut
  6. Funnel

To access the spare tire and tools:

  1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate page  19.
  2. Remove the load floor.
  3. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove the spare tire. Place the spare tire next to the tire being changed.
  4. Remove the jack and tools and place them near the tire being changed.

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire

  1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See If a Tire Goes Flat page 33.
    Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual51
  2. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen all the wheel nuts, but do not remove them yet.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 59
  3. Place the jack at the position marked with a half circle.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 60
  4. Place the hex tube end of the wrench over the hex head of the jack to attach it.
  5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise until the lift head is firmly contacting the proper lifting point nearest the flat tire.
    Warning
    Getting under a vehicle when it is lifted on a jack is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
    Raising the vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.
    Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
  6. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
  7. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to remove them.
  8. Remove the flat tire.
    Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 53
  9. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack lift head until the slots in the jack head fit into the metal flange behind the cut out on the plastic molding. Do not raise the vehicle yet.
  10. Put the compact spare tire near you.
  11. Turn the wrench clockwise in the jack to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so that there is enough room for the spare tire to fit under the wheel well
    Warning
    Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can cause wheel nuts to become loose over time. The wheel could come off and cause a crash. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt.
  12. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, and spare wheel.
  13. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
  14. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
  15. Remove the flat tire.
    Warning
    Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can cause wheel nuts to become loose over time. The wheel could come off and cause a crash. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt.
    Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual55Warning
    Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
  16. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
  17. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
    Warning
    Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing. Follow the torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities and Specifications 0  for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications.
    Caution
    Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications page 332 for the wheel nut torque specification.
    Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual56
  18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly with the wheel wrench in a crisscross sequence, as shown.

Caution
Wheel covers will not fit on the vehicle’s compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be damaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools

Warning
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

  1. Return the jack and tools to their original storage location.
  2.  Replace the load floor.
  3. Place the flat tire, lying flat, in the rear storage compartment.
  4. Attach one end of the strap to a cargo tie-down in the rear of the vehicle.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 63
  5. Route the strap through the wheel, as shown.
  6. Attach the other end of the strap to the other cargo tie-down in the rear of the vehicle.
  7. Tighten the strap.
  1. Storing the Compact Spare Tire and Tools
    To store the spare tire and tools:

Reverse the instructions for removing the spare tire and tools to store the spare tire.

Reverse the instructions for removing the spare tire and tools to store the spare tire.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only. Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire page 308.

The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as you can.

Compact Spare Tire
Warning
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at a time could result in loss of braking and handling. This could lead to a crash and you or others could be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact spare tire, it was fully inflated when new; however, it can lose air over time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 420 kPa (60 psi).
Stop as soon as possible and check that the spare tire is correctly inflated after being installed on the vehicle. The compact spare  tire is designed for temporary use only. The vehicle will perform differently with the spare tire installed and it is recommended that the vehicle speed be limited to 80 km/h (50 mph). To conserve the tread of the spare tire, have the standard tire repaired or replaced as soon as convenient and return the spare tire to the storage area.
When using a compact spare tire, the AWD (if equipped), ABS, and Traction Control systems may engage until the spare tire is recognized by the vehicle, especially on slippery roads. Adjust driving to reduce  possible wheel slip.

Caution
When the compact spare is installed, do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails which can damage the tire, wheel, and other parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Caution
Tire chains will not fit the compact spare. Using them can damage the vehicle and the chains. Do not use tire chains on the compact spare.

Jump Starting

Jump Starting – North America
For more information about the vehicle battery, see Battery – North America page 268.
If the battery has run down, try to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

Warning
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories can expose you to chemicals including lead and lead compounds, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov

See California Proposition 65 Warning page 1.

Warning
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because

  • They contain acid that can burn you.
  • They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
  • They contain enough electricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.

 

Caution
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.

Caution
If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 64

Connection Points and Sequence

  1. Discharged Battery Positive (+) Terminal
  2. Good Battery Positive (+) Terminal
  3. Good Battery Negative (−) Terminal
  4. Discharged Battery Negative (−) Grounding Point

The discharged battery positive (+) terminal and the discharged battery negative (–) grounding point are on the driver side of the vehicle.

The good battery positive (+) terminal and the good battery negative (–) terminal are on the battery of the vehicle providing the jump start.

The discharged battery positive (+) terminal is under a cover. Open the cover to expose the terminal.

  1. . Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
    Caution
    If the other vehicle does not have a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. Only use a vehicle that has a 12-volt system with a negative ground for jump starting.
  2. Position the two vehicles so that they are not touching.
  3. Set the parking brake firmly and put the shift lever in P (Park) with an automatic transmission, or Neutral with a manual transmission.
    Caution
    If any accessories are left on or plugged in during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Whenever possible, turn off or unplug all accessories on either vehicle when jump starting.
  4. Turn the ignition off. Turn off all lights and accessories in both vehicles, except the hazard warning flashers if needed
    Warning
    An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
    Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light.
    Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.
    Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.
  5. Connect one end of the red positive (+) cable to the discharged battery positive (+) terminal.
  6. Connect the other end of the red positive (+) cable to the good battery positive (+) terminal.
  7. Connect one end of the black negative (–) cable to the good battery negative (–) terminal.
  8. Connect the other end of the black negative (–) cable to the discharged battery negative (–) grounding point.
  9. Start the engine in the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine at idle speed for at least four minutes.
  10. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service.

Jumper Cable Removal
Reverse the sequence exactly when removing the jumper cables.
After starting the disabled vehicle and removing the jumper cables, allow it to idle for several minutes.

Towing the Vehicle

Transporting a Disabled Vehicle

Caution
Incorrectly transporting a disabled vehicle may cause damage to the vehicle. Use proper tire straps to secure the vehicle to the flatbed tow truck. Do not strap or hook to any frame, underbody,
or suspension component not specified below. Do not move vehicles with drive axle tires on the ground. Damage is not covered by the vehicle warranty.

The vehicle may be equipped with an electric parking brake and/or an electronic shifter. In the event of a loss of 12-volt battery power, the electric parking brake cannot be released, and the vehicle cannot be shifted to N (Neutral). Tire skates or dollies must be used under the non-rolling tires to prevent damage while loading/unloading the vehicle. Dragging the vehicle will cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

The vehicle may be equipped with an electric parking brake and/or an electronic shifter. In the event of a loss of 12-volt battery power, the electric parking brake cannot be released, and the vehicle cannot be shifted to N (Neutral). Tire skates or dollies must be used under the non-rolling tires to prevent damage while loading/unloading the vehicle. Dragging the vehicle will cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

Contact a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be transported. GM recommends a flatbed tow truck to transport a disabled vehicle. Use ramps to help reduce approach angles, if necessary.

If equipped, a tow eye may be located near the spare tire or emergency jack. Do not use the tow eye to pull the vehicle from the snow, mud, sand, or ditch. Tow eye threads may have right or left-hand threads. Use caution when installing or removing the tow eye.

The vehicle must be in N (Neutral) and the electric parking brake must be released when loading the vehicle onto a flatbed tow truck.

  • If the vehicle is equipped with car wash mode and has 12-volt battery power, refer to “Car Wash Mode” under Automatic Transmission page 207 to place the vehicle in N (Neutral).
  • If the 12-volt battery is dead and/or the engine will not start, the vehicle will not move. Try to jump start the Refer to Jump Starting – North America page 309 and if the jump start is successful, retry the “Car Wash Mode” procedure.
  • If jump starting is unsuccessful, the vehicle will not move. Tire skates or dollies must be used under the non-rolling tires to prevent vehicle damage.

Front Attachment Points

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 65The vehicle is equipped with specific attachment points to be used by the towing provider. These holes may be used to pull the vehicle from a flat road surface onto the flatbed tow truck.

Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle, such as behind a motor home. The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing. Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground.

Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly.

Here are some important things to consider before recreational vehicle towing:

  • Before towing the vehicle, become familiar with the local laws that apply to recreational vehicle towing. These laws may vary by region.
  • The towing capacity of the towing vehicle. Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s recommendations.
  • How far the vehicle will be towed. Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can be towed.
  • The proper towing equipment. See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations.
  • If the vehicle is ready to be towed. Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed.

Caution
Use of a shield mounted in front of the vehicle grille could restrict airflow and cause damage to the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If using a shield, only use one that attaches to the towing vehicle.

Dinghy Towing (Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 62

Caution
If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain components could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground.

The vehicle is not designed to be towed with all four wheels on the ground. If the vehicle must be towed, a dolly should be used. See the following information on dolly towing.

Dinghy Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Only)

Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 63

Driving onto a Dolly

  1. Park the vehicle on level ground in front of the dolly and turn the vehicle off.
  2. Make sure the parking brake is released .
  3. Press and hold ENGINE START/STOP with your foot off the brake for five seconds.
  4. Hold the brake pedal down and press the parking brake switch for 15 seconds until the service parking brake light flashes.
  5. While the service parking brake light is still flashing, remove your foot from the brake pedal and release the parking brake switch.
  6. Immediately press and release the parking brake switch again while the service park brake light is still flashing.
  7. Start the vehicle and drive onto the dolly.
  8. Place the vehicle in P (Park).
  9. Turn off the vehicle .
  10. Open the hood.
  11. Exit the vehicle and secure the vehicle onto the dolly.
  12. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal connector from the 12-volt battery.
  13. Close the hood of the vehicle .

Removing the Vehicle from a Dolly

  1. Make sure the vehicle is secured to the
  2. Open the door and hood of the vehicle .
  3. Connect the negative (–) terminal connector from the 12-volt
  4. Press and hold ENGINE START/STOP with your foot off the brake for five seconds.
  5. Hold the brake pedal down and press the parking brake switch for five seconds until the parking brake light flashes.
  6. Turn the vehicle off.
  7. Disconnect the vehicle and remove it from the dolly.

Towing the Vehicle from the Rear

Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 64

Buick Enclave 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual 65

Caution
Towing the vehicle from the rear could damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed from the rear.

Do not tow the vehicle from the rear.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks
Locks are lubricated at the factory. Use a deicing agent only when absolutely necessary, and have the locks greased after using. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants page 328.

Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the vehicle’s finish, wash it often and out of direct sunlight.

Caution
Avoid using high-pressure washes closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of power washers exceeding 8 274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Caution
Do not power wash any component under the hood that has this e symbol.
This could cause damage that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash, follow the car wash instructions. The windshield wiper and rear window wiper, if equipped, must be off. Remove any accessories that may be damaged or interfere with the car wash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after, to remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

Finish Care
Application of aftermarket clearcoat sealant/ wax materials is not recommended.

If painted surfaces are damaged, see your dealer to have the damage assessed and repaired. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Occasional hand waxing or mild polishing should be done to remove residue from the paint finish. See your dealer for approved cleaning products.

Do not apply waxes or polishes to uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, decals, simulated wood, or flat paint as damage can occur.

Caution
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Moldings

Caution
Failure to clean and protect the bright metal moldings can result in a hazy white finish or pitting. This damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on the vehicle are aluminum, chrome, or stainless steel. To prevent damage always follow these cleaning instructions:

  • Be sure the molding is cool to the touch before applying any cleaning solution.
    • Use only approved cleaning solutions for aluminum, chrome, or stainless steel.
  • Some cleaners are highly acidic or contain alkaline substances and can damage the moldings.
    • Always dilute a concentrated cleaner according to the manufacturer’s
    • Do not use cleaners that are not intended for automotive use.
    • Use a nonabrasive wax on the vehicle after washing to protect and extend the molding finish.
  • Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals, and Stripes
    Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth, and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps, lenses, emblems, decals, and stripes. Follow instructions under “Washing the Vehicle” previously in this section. Lamp covers are made of plastic, and some have a UV protective coating. Do not clean or wipe them when dry.Do not use any of the following on lamp covers:

    • Abrasive or caustic agents
    • Washer fluids and other cleaning agents in higher concentrations than suggested by the manufacturer
    • Solvents, alcohols, fuels, or other harsh cleaners
    • Ice scrapers or other hard items
    • Aftermarket appearance caps or covers while the lamps are illuminated, due to excessive heat generated.
  • Caution
    Failure to clean lamps properly can cause damage to the lamp cover that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
  • Caution
    Using wax on low gloss black finish stripes can increase the gloss level and create a non-uniform finish. Clean low gloss stripes with soap and water only.

Air Intakes
Clear debris from the air intakes, between the hood and windshield, when washing the vehicle.

Shutter System

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual72

The vehicle may have a shutter system designed to help improve fuel economy. Keep the shutter system clear of debris, snow and ice. If the check engine light is activated, please check to see if the shutter system is clear of debris, snow or ice.

Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged. Damage can be caused by extreme dusty conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips
Apply weatherstrip lubricant on weatherstrips to make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips at least once a year. Hot, dry climates may require more frequent application. Black marks from rubber material on painted surfaces can be removed by rubbing with a clean cloth. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants page 328.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to clean the tires.

Caution
Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Wheel Trim
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild soap and water to clean the wheels. After rinsing thoroughly with clean water, dry with a soft, clean towel. A wax may then be applied.

Caution
Chrome wheels and chrome wheel trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium chloride or calcium chloride. These are used on roads for conditions such as dust and ice. Always wash the chrome with soap and water after exposure.

Caution
To avoid surface damage on wheels and wheel trim, do not use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, or brushes. Use only GM approved cleaners. Do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash that uses silicon carbide tire/wheel cleaning brushes. Damage could occur and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Brake System
Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper attachment, connections, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect all other brake parts for cracks and leaks.

Steering, Suspension, and Chassis Components
Visually inspect steering, suspension, and chassis components for damaged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear at least once a year.

Inspect power steering for proper electrical connections, binding, cracks, chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity joint boots and axle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the steel fuel door hinges, unless the components are plastic. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

Underbody Maintenance
At least twice a year, spring and fall, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to thoroughly clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect.

Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or axles and should be replaced.

Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty.

Finish Damage
Quickly repair minor chips and scratches with touch-up materials available from your dealer to avoid corrosion. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting
Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted vehicle surfaces causing blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. See “Finish Care” previously in this section.

Interior Care
To prevent dirt particle abrasions, regularly clean the vehicle’s interior. Before using cleaners, read and follow all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning the interior, open the doors and windows to get proper ventilation. Newspapers or dark garments can transfer color to the vehicle’s interior.

Caution
Immediately remove cleaners, hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect repellent from all interior surfaces or permanent damage may result.

Caution
Use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned to prevent permanent damage to the vehicle. Apply all cleaners directly to a cleaning cloth. Do not spray cleaners on any switches or controls.

When using liquid soap cleaners, follow the directions on the specific cleaner or soap solution for dilution instructions.

To prevent damage:

  • Never use a razor or any other sharp object to remove soil from any interior surface
  • Never use a brush with stiff
  • Never rub any surface aggressively or with too much pressure.
  • Do not get any exposed electrical components wet.
  • Do not use laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. Do not use solutions that contain strong or caustic soap.
  • Do not heavily saturate the upholstery when cleaning.
  • Do not use solvents or cleaners containing solvents.
  • Do not use disinfecting wipes that are scented or contain Do not use wipes or cleaners that show a color transfer to the wipe or change the appearance of the interior surface when used.
  • Do not use scented or gel-type hand sanitizers. If hand sanitizer comes in contact with interior surfaces of the vehicle, blot immediately and clean with a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap and water solution.

Interior Glass
To clean, use a microfiber cloth fabric dampened with water. Wipe droplets left behind with a clean dry cloth. If necessary, use a commercial glass cleaner after cleaning with plain water.

Caution
To prevent scratching, never use abrasive cleaners on automotive glass. Abrasive cleaners or aggressive cleaning may damage the rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with water during the first three to six months of ownership will reduce tendency to fog.

Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with water and mild soap.

Coated Moldings
Coated moldings should be cleaned.

  • When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water .
  • When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water.

Vinyl/Rubber
If equipped with vinyl floor and rubber floor mats, use a soft cloth and/or brush dampened with water to remove dust and loose dirt. For more thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution.

Warning
Do not use cleaners that contain silicone, wax-based products, or cleaners that increase gloss on vinyl/rubber floor and mats. These cleaners can permanently change the appearance and feel of the vinyl/rubber and can make the floor slippery. Your foot could slip while operating the vehicle, and you could lose control, resulting in a crash. You or others could be injured.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede
Start by vacuuming the surface using a soft brush attachment. If a rotating vacuum brush attachment is being used, only use it on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as possible:

Gently blot liquids with a paper towel. Continue blotting until no more soil can be removed.

  • For solid soils, remove as much as possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

  1. Saturate a clean, lint-free colorfast cloth with water. Microfiber cloth is recommended to prevent lint transfer to the fabric or carpet.
  2. Remove excess moisture by gently wringing until water does not drip from the cleaning cloth.
  3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center. Fold the cleaning cloth to a clean area frequently to prevent forcing the soil into the fabric .
  4. Continue gently rubbing the soiled area until there is no longer any color transfer from the soil to the cleaning
  5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild soap solution followed only by plain water.

If the soil is not completely removed, it may be necessary to use a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small hidden area for colorfastness before using a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. If ring formation occurs, clean the entire fabric or carpet.

After cleaning, use a paper towel to blot excess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces and Vehicle Information and Radio Displays
Use a microfiber cloth on high gloss surfaces or vehicle displays. First, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt that can scratch the surface. Then gently clean by rubbing with a microfiber cloth. Never use window cleaners or solvents. Periodically hand wash the microfiber cloth separately, using mild soap. Do not use bleach or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly and air dry before next use.

Caution
Do not attach a device with a suction cup to the display. This may cause damage and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather, Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces, Low Gloss Paint Surfaces, and Natural Open Pore Wood Surfaces

Use a soft bristle brush to remove dust from knobs and crevices on the instrument cluster. Use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with water to remove dust and loose dirt. For a more thorough cleaning, use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with a mild soap and water solution.

Caution
Soaking or saturating leather, especially perforated leather, as well as other interior surfaces, may cause permanent damage. Wipe excess moisture from these surfaces after cleaning and allow them to dry naturally. Never use heat, steam, or spot removers. Do not use liquids that contain alcohol or solvents on leather seats. Do not use cleaners that contain silicone or wax-based products. Cleaners containing these solvents can permanently change the appearance and feel of leather or soft trim, and are not recommended.

Do not use cleaners that increase gloss, especially on the instrument panel. Reflected glare can decrease visibility through the windshield under certain conditions.

Caution
Use of air fresheners may cause permanent damage to plastics and painted surfaces. If an air freshener comes in contact with any plastic or painted surface in the vehicle, blot immediately and clean with a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution. Damage caused by air fresheners would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover and Convenience Net
If equipped, wash with warm water and mild detergent. Do not use chlorine bleach. Rinse with cold water, and then dry completely.

Care of Seat Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

Warning
Do not bleach or dye seat belt webbing. It may severely weaken the webbing. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean and rinse seat belt webbing only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Allow the webbing to dry.

Floor Mats
Warning
If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the pedals. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the pedals.

Use the following guidelines for proper floor mat use:

  • The original equipment floor mats are designed for your vehicle. If the floor mats need to be replaced, it is recommended that GM-certified floor mats are purchased. Non-GM floor mats may not fit properly and may interfere with the pedals. Always check that the floor mats do not interfere .
  • Do not use a floor mat if the vehicle is not equipped with a floor mat retainer on the driver side floor.
  • Use the floor mat with the correct side up. Do not turn it over.
  • Do not place anything on top of the driver side floor mat.
  • Use only a single floor mat on the driver side.
  • Do not place one floor mat on top of another.

The driver side floor mat is held in place by a button-type retainer.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Vehicle Care User Manual73

Removing and Replacing the Floor Mat

  1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to unlock and remove.
  2. Reinstall the floor mat by lining up the floor mat opening over the carpet retainer and snapping into position.
  3. Make sure the floor mat is properly secured. Verify the floor mat does not interfere with the pedals.

Cleaning Rubber Floor Mats (All-Weather Mats and Floor Liners)

See “Vinyl/Rubber” under Interior Care page 319 for important cleaning information.

FAQs

  1. How often should I change the oil in my Buick Encore GX 2023?
    Your Buick Encore GX 2023 should have its oil changed about every 7,500 to 10,000 miles, or as needed, according to the oil life monitoring system. The owner’s manual, however, is always the best source for the manufacturer’s precise instructions.
  2. What type of oil should I use for my Encore GX?
    Depending on the engine, a different oil type may be suggested for the Encore GX. It is typically advised to use premium, dexos-certified oil that complies with the owner’s manual’s specification requirements.
  3. How often should I rotate the tires on my Encore GX?
    The tires on your Encore GX should generally be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles or as directed by the tire manufacturer. Tire rotation on a regular basis helps to ensure even tire wear and extend the life of the tires.
  4. Can I wash my Encore GX at an automatic car wash?
    Yes, you can use an automatic car wash to clean your Encore GX. To prevent any potential harm to the vehicle’s exterior finish, it is advised to use touchless or soft cloth car washes.
  5. How often should I replace the engine air filter in my Encore GX?
    It is recommended to regularly check and, if necessary, replace the engine air filter. The engine air filter should typically be changed every 30,000 to 45,000 miles, or as specified by the vehicle’s maintenance schedule, depending on driving conditions.
  6. Do I need to use a specific type of windshield washer fluid in my Encore GX?
    Use of windshield washer fluid made specifically for use in automotive systems is advised. These fluids effectively assist in cleaning the windshield of dirt, debris, and grime from the road.
  7. How often should I check the tire pressure in my Encore GX?
    Checking the tire pressure in your Encore GX at least once a month is a good idea. The handling, fuel economy, and tire wear of the vehicle can all be impacted by incorrect tire pressure.
  8. Can I use aftermarket accessories on my Encore GX?
    On your Encore GX, it is possible to use aftermarket accessories, but it’s crucial to make sure they are compatible and installed properly. For advice, it is suggested that you speak with a reputable Buick dealership or automotive expert.
  9. How often should I replace the cabin air filter in my Encore GX?
    Every so often, the cabin air filter should be checked and, if necessary, replaced. The cabin air filter should typically be changed every 12,000 to 15,000 miles or as directed by the vehicle’s maintenance schedule.
  10. Should I use fuel additives in my Encore GX?
    The regular use of fuel additives in Buick vehicles is typically not advised. To ensure proper engine performance, it is best to use premium gas from reliable gas stations.
  11. How often should I check the fluid levels in my Encore GX?
    Regularly checking the fluid levels in your Encore GX, including the engine oil, coolant, brake fluid, and transmission fluid, is a good idea. For detailed directions and suggested timing, consult the owner’s manual.
  12. Can I use wax or polish on the exterior of my Encore GX?
    Yes, you can use wax or polish to protect and improve the paint finish on the exterior of your Encore GX. For best results, adhere to the directions given by the wax or polish manufacturer.
  13. How often should I replace the wiper blades on my Encore GX?
    When wiper blades begin to deteriorate or stop clearing the windshield as effectively as they once did, they should be replaced. Wiper blades should typically be changed every 6 to 12 months or as needed.

2023 Buick Encore Gx Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Useful Links

View Full Manual: Buick Encore GX 2023 User Manual | Auto User Guide
Download Manual: Manuals and Guides | Vehicle Support | Buick

Related Article

2024 Buick Envista Specs, Price, Features, Mileage and Review

2023 Buick Enclave Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2023 Buick Envision Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2024 Buick Encore GX Specs, Price, Features, Mileage and Review

Categories
Buick Encore GX

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual

Buick Logo

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual

Driving Information

Driver Behavior
Driving is an important responsibility. Driver behavior, the driving environment, and the vehicle’s design all affect how well a vehicle performs.
Being aware of these factors can help in understanding how the vehicle handles and what can be done to avoid many types of  crashes, including a rollover crash.
Most serious injuries and fatalities to unbelted occupants can be reduced or prevented by the use of seat belts. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. In addition, avoiding excessive speed, sudden or abrupt turns, impaired driving, and aggressive driving can help make trips safer and avoid the possibility of a crash.

Driving Environment
Be prepared for driving in inclement weather, at night, or during other times where visibility or traction may be limited, such as on curves, slippery roads, or hilly terrain. Unfamiliar surroundings can also have hidden hazards.

Vehicle Design
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
This is because they have a higher ground clearance and a narrower track or shorter wheelbase than passenger cars. While these design characteristics provide the driver with a better view of the road, these vehicles do have a higher center of gravity than other types of vehicles. A utility vehicle does not handle the same as a vehicle with a lower center of gravity, like a car, in similar situations.
Safe driver behavior and understanding of the environment can help avoid a rollover crash in any type of vehicle, including utility vehicles.

Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.

  • Set the climate controls to the desired temperature after the engine is started, or turn them off when not required.
  • On AWD vehicles, see All-Wheel Drive page  204.
  • Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
  • Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
  • Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
  • When road and weather conditions are appropriate, use cruise control.
  • Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require.
  • Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
  • Combine several trips into a single trip.
  • Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
  • Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.

Distracted Driving
Distraction comes in many forms and can take your focus from the task of driving. Exercise good judgment and do not let other activities divert your attention away from the road. Many local governments have enacted laws regarding driver distraction.

Become familiar with the local laws in your area.

To avoid distracted driving, keep your eyes on the road, keep your hands on the steering wheel, and focus your attention on driving.

  • Do not use a phone in demanding driving situations. Use a hands-free method to place or receive necessary phone calls.
  • Watch the road. Do not read, take notes, or look up information on phones or other electronic devices.
  • Designate a front seat passenger to handle potential distractions.
  • Become familiar with vehicle features before driving, such as programming favorite radio stations and adjusting climate control and seat settings. Program all trip information into any navigation device prior to driving.
  • Wait until the vehicle is parked to retrieve items that have fallen to the floor.
  • Stop or park the vehicle to tend to children.
  • Keep pets in an appropriate carrier or restraint.
  • Avoid stressful conversations while driving, whether with a passenger or on a cell phone.

Warning
Taking your eyes off the road too long or too often could cause a crash resulting in injury or death. Focus your attention on driving.
Refer to the infotainment section for more information on using that system and the navigation system, if equipped, including pairing and using a cell phone.

Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to wear the seat belt. See Seat Belts page 44

  • Assume that other road users (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they may do and be ready.
  • Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you.
  • Focus on the task of driving .

Impaired Driving
Death and injury associated with impaired driving is a global tragedy.

Warning
Drinking alcohol or taking drugs and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol or drugs. You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking or taking drugs.
Do not drive while under the influence of alcohol or drugs, or ride with a driver who has been drinking or is impaired by drugs. Find alternate transportation home; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will remain sober.

Control of a Vehicle
Braking, steering, and accelerating are important factors in helping to control a vehicle while driving.

Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time. Actually doing it is reaction time.

Average driver reaction time is about three-quarters of a second. In that time, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft), which could be a lot of distance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mind include:

  • Keep enough distance between you and the vehicle in front of you.
  • Avoid needless heavy braking .
  • Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes. Doing so could make the pedal harder to push down. If the engine stops, there will be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering
Caution
To avoid damage to the steering system, do not drive over curbs, parking barriers, or similar objects at speeds greater than 3 km/h (1 mph). Use care when driving over other objects such as lane dividers and speed bumps. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not covered by the vehicle warranty.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 01

Electric Power Steering

The vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering system, which reduces the amount of effort needed to steer the vehicle. It does not have power steering fluid. Regular maintenance is not required.

If the vehicle experiences a system malfunction and loses power steering, greater steering effort may be required. Power steering assist also may be reduced if you turn the steering wheel as far as it can turn and hold it there with force for an extended period of time.

See your dealer if there is a problem.

Curve Tips

  • Take curves at a reasonable speed.
  • Reduce speed before entering a curve.
  • Maintain a reasonable steady speed through the curve.
  • Wait until the vehicle is out of the curve before accelerating gently into the curve.
Steering in Emergencies

There are some situations when steering around a problem may be more effective than braking.

    • Holding both sides of the steering wheel allows you to turn 180 degrees without removing a hand.
    • The Antilock Brake System (ABS) allows steering while braking.Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 02

The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. Follow these tips:

  1. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle so that it straddles the edge of the pavement.
  2. Turn the steering wheel about one-eighth of a turn, until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
  3. Turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

Loss of Control
Skidding

There are three types of skids that correspond to the vehicle’s three control systems:

  • Braking Skid — wheels are not rolling.
  • Steering or Cornering Skid — too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
  • Acceleration Skid — too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, follow these suggestions:

  • Ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and steer the way you want the vehicle to The vehicle may straighten out. Be ready for a second skid if it occurs.
  • Slow down and adjust your driving according to weather conditions. Stopping distance can be longer and vehicle control can be affected when traction is reduced by water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material on the road. Learn to recognize warning clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down when you have any doubt.
  • Try to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes help avoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing water.

Warning
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of water or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. Driving through flowing water could cause the vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore police warnings and be very  cautious about trying to drive through flowing water.

Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under the vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough. When the vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet

Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips include:

  • Allow extra following
  • Pass with caution.
  • Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
  • Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir
  • Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires page 287.
  • Turn off cruise
  • Activate All-Wheel Drive (AWD) See

All-Wheel Drive page 204.

Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

  • Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
  • Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission.
  • Shift to a lower gear when going down steep or long hills.
  • Warning
    Using the brakes to slow the vehicle on a long downhill slope can cause brake overheating, can reduce brake performance, and could result in a loss of braking. Shift the transmission to a lower gear to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.

Warning
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. This can cause overheating of the brakes and loss of steering assist. Always have the engine running and the vehicle in gear.

  • Drive at speeds that keep the vehicle in its own lane. Do not swing wide or cross the center line.
  • Be alert on top of hills; something could be in your lane (e.g., stalled car, crash).
    Pay attention to special road signs (e.g., falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
  • Select All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Mode. See All-Wheel Drive page 204.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice
Caution
To avoid damage to the wheels and brake components, always clear snow and ice from inside the wheels and underneath the vehicle before driving.

Snow or ice between the tires and the road creates less traction or grip, so drive carefully. Wet ice can occur at about 0

°C (32 °F) when freezing rain begins to fall.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated.
For Slippery Road Driving:

  • Accelerate gently. Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick.
  • Turn on Traction Control. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control page 207.
  • The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves vehicle stability during hard stops, but the brakes should be applied sooner than when on dry pavement. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) page  205.
  • Allow greater following distance an watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice.
  • Turn off cruise control.
  • Select All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Mode. See All-Wheel Drive page 204.

Cold Weather Mode
In very low temperatures, a cold weather message may display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). The engine speed, transmission shift patterns, and cabin fan speed may operate differently to enable the vehicle to warm up quicker. You can manually override the cabin fan speed in cold weather mode.

Blizzard Conditions
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and signal for help. Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible, use Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program page 339. To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:

  • Turn on the hazard warning flashers
  • Tie a red cloth to an outside

Warning
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle. This may cause exhaust gases to get inside. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO), which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

  • Clear snow from the base of the vehicle, especially any blocking the exhaust pipe.
  • Open a window about 5 cm (2 in) on the vehicle side that is away from the wind, to bring in fresh air.
  • Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.
  • Adjust the climate control system to circulate the air inside the vehicle and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See “Climate Control Systems.”

For more information about CO, see Engine Exhaust page  201.

  • To save fuel, run the engine for short periods to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and partially close the window. Moving about to keep warm also helps. If it takes time for help to arrive, when running the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible, to save fuel.
  • Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 07

If the Vehicle Is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off and use the rocking method. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control page 207.

Warning
If the vehicle’s tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 56 km/h (35 mph).

If equipped, select All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Mode. See All-Wheel Drive page 204.

Rocking the Vehicle to Get it Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a low forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see Transporting  a Disabled Vehicle page 311.

Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how much weight the vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all non factory-installed options.
Two labels on the vehicle may show how much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire label.

Warning
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle handles. This could cause loss of control and a crash.

Tire and Loading Information Label

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 43

Example Label

A vehicle-specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions (1), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (2) in kilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires (3) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (4). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires page 287 and Tire Pressure page 292.

There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It may show the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.

“Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

  1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX ” on your vehicle’s placard.
  2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
  3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
  4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
    (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
  5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
  6.  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred  to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing page 243 for important information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and trailering tips.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 03

Example 1

  1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
  2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg (300 lbs).
  3. Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs).

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 04

Example 2

  1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
  2.  Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg (750 lbs).
  3.  Available Cargo Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs).

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 05

Example 3

  1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
  2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
  3. Available Cargo Weight = 0 kg (0 lbs).
    Refer to the vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about the vehicle’s capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed the vehicle’s capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 06Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certification/Tire label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).
The label may show the size of the vehicle’s original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity  of the vehicle. The label shows the gross weight capacity of the vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label may also show the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on the front and rear axles, weigh the vehicle at a weigh station. Your dealer can help with this. Be sure to spread the load equally on both sides of the centerline.

Caution
Overloading the vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.

Warning
Things inside the vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

  • Put things in the cargo area of the vehicle. In the cargo area, put them as far forward as possible. Try to spread the weight evenly.
  • Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.
  • Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in the vehicle.
  • Secure loose items in the vehicle.
  • Do not leave a seat folded down unless needed.

Starting and Operating

New Vehicle Break-In
Caution
The vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:

  • Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or slow, for the first 800 km (500 mi). Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
  • Avoid making hard stops for the first 300 km (200 mi) or so. During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings.
  • Do not tow a trailer during break-in.

See Trailer Towing page 243 for the trailer towing capabilities of the vehicle and more information.

Following break-in, engine speed and load can be gradually increased.

On new vehicles, the various mechanical and electrical systems experience a “break-in” period during the first 6 400 km (4,000 mi) of routine driving. As the vehicle is driven, the mechanical systems adjust to provide optimal fuel economy and transmission shift performance.

Electrical systems will adapt and calibrate during the break-in period. A one-time occurrence of clicks and similar vehicle noises is normal during this process.

Normal driving charges the vehicle’s battery to achieve the best operation of the vehicle, including fuel economy and the Stop/Start System. See Stop/Start System page 195.

Ignition Positions

Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 9

Vehicles with Keyless Access have pushbutton starting.

The remote key must be in the vehicle for the system to operate. If the pushbutton start is not working, the vehicle may be near a strong radio antenna signal causing interference to the Keyless Access system. See Remote Key Operation page 8

Stopping the Engine/OFF (No Indicator Lights) : When the vehicle is stopped, press ENGINE START/STOP once to turn the engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), the ignition will turn off, and Retained Accessory Power (RAP) will remain active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) page 199

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), the ignition will return to accessory mode and display the message SHIFT TO PARK in the Driver Information Center (DIC).

If the vehicle is in N (Neutral), the ignition will return to accessory mode and display the message SHIFT TO PARK in the Driver Information Center (DIC). When the vehicle is shifted into P (Park), the ignition will turn off.

The vehicle may have an electric steering column lock. The lock is activated when the vehicle is turned off and either front door is opened. A sound may be heard as the lock actuates or releases. The steering column lock may not release with the wheels turned off center. If this happens, the vehicle may not start. Move the steering wheel from left to right while attempting to start the vehicle. If this does not work, the vehicle needs service.

Do not turn the engine off when the vehicle is moving. This will cause a loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in an emergency:

  1. Brake using a firm and steady pressure. Do not pump the brakes This may deplete power assist, requiring increased brake pedal force.
  2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). This can be done while the vehicle is moving. After shifting to N (Neutral), firmly apply the brakes and steer the vehicle to a safe location.
  3. Come to a complete stop and shift to P (Park).
  4. Set the parking brake. See Electric Parking Brake page 205.

Warning
Turning off the vehicle while moving may cause loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags. While driving, only shut the vehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, and must be shut off while driving, press and hold ENGINE START/STOP for longer than two seconds, or press twice in five seconds.
Accessory Mode (Amber Indicator Light) : This mode allows some electrical accessories to be used when the engine is off.
With the ignition off, pressing the button one time without the brake pedal applied will place the ignition system in accessory mode.
The ignition will switch from accessory mode to OFF after five minutes to prevent battery rundown.
ON/RUN/START (Green Indicator Light) : This mode is for driving and starting. With the ignition off, and the brake pedal applied, pressing the button once will place the ignition system in ON/RUN/START. Once engine cranking begins, release the button. Engine cranking will continue until the engine starts. See Starting the Engine page 194.

The ignition will then remain on.

Service Mode
This power mode is available for service and diagnostics, and to verify the proper operation of the malfunction indicator lamp as may be required for emission inspection purposes. With the vehicle off, and the brake pedal not applied, pressing and holding the button for more than five seconds will place the vehicle in Service Mode. The instruments and audio systems will operate as they do in ON/RUN, but the vehicle will not be able to be driven. The engine will not start in Service Mode. Press the button again to turn the vehicle off.

Starting the Engine
Shift the vehicle into P (Park) or N (Neutral).
To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.

Caution
Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle is stopped.

Caution
If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. See Add-On Electrical Equipment page 248.

Gasoline Engine Starting Procedure

  1. With the Keyless Access system, the remote key must be in the vehicle. Press ENGINE START/STOP with the brake pedal applied. When the engine begins cranking, let go of the button.
    The idle speed will go down as the engine gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
    If the remote key is not in the vehicle, if there is interference, or if the remote key battery is low, a Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a message. See Remote Key Operation page 9 .
    Caution
    Cranking the engine for long periods of time, by trying to start the engine immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to let the cranking motor cool down.
  2. If the engine does not start after five to 10 seconds, especially in very cold weather (below −18 °C or 0°F), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you press ENGINE START/STOP. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts, release the accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Stop/Start System
This vehicle has a Stop/Start system to shut off the engine to help conserve fuel. It has components designed for the increased number of starts.

Warning
The automatic engine Stop/Start feature causes the engine to shut off while the vehicle is still on. Do not exit the vehicle before shifting to P (Park). The vehicle may restart and move unexpectedly. Always shift to P (Park), and then turn the ignition off before exiting the vehicle.

Auto Engine Stop/Start
When the brakes are applied and the vehicle is at a complete stop, the engine may turn off. When stopped, the tachometer displays AUTO STOP. See Tachometer page 101. When the brake pedal is released or the accelerator pedal is pressed, the engine will restart.
To maintain vehicle performance, other conditions may cause the engine to automatically restart before the brake pedal is released.
Auto Stops may not occur and/or auto restarts may occur because:

  • The climate control settings require the engine to be running to cool or heat the vehicle interior.
    The vehicle battery needs to charge.
    The vehicle battery has recently been disconnected.
    Minimum vehicle speed has not been reached since the last Auto Stop.
    The accelerator pedal is pressed.
    The engine or transmission is not at the required operating temperature.
    The outside temperature is not in the required operating range.
  • The vehicle transmission is shifted out of D (Drive) to any gear other than P (Park).
    Certain driver modes have been selected.
    The vehicle is on a steep hill or grade.
    The driver door has been opened or driver seat belt has been unbuckled.
    The hood has been opened.
    The Auto Stop has reached the maximum allowed time.

Auto Stop Disable Switch

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 08

The automatic engine stop/start feature can be disabled and enabled by pressing the switch with the h symbol. Auto Stop is enabled each time you start the vehicle.

When the indicator above h is illuminated, the system is disabled.

Winter Cover
If equipped, the winter cover can be used to enhance heater performance in extremely cold conditions below −0 °C (32 °F). The winter cover installs over the grille and restricts airflow to the engine compartment.

Usage Guidelines
The winter cover should only be used while operating the vehicle in extremely cold temperatures or in heavy snow for extended periods. In these temperatures, the vehicle does not need a large amount of air to properly cool the engine. When more airflow is required to cool the vehicle, the winter cover should not be used. The following usage guidelines will allow adequate airflow for proper radiator and air cooler performance:

  • Do not use the winter cover if towing a trailer. The vehicle may overheat if the radiator is covered while towing.
  • Do not modify the cover. The winter cover does not cover some sections of the front of the vehicle to provide enough airflow.
  • Keep the underside of the winter cover as clean as possible. Remove monthly or as necessary and clean away dust and debris .
  • Do not use the winter cover above −0 °C (32 °F).

Use only a mild soap to clean. Do not use harsh soap, strong detergents, or vinyl protectant/sealant type products as they may damage the special finish. Allow the winter cover to dry completely before reinstalling.

Installation Instructions
When first trying to fit the cover, it may appear to be undersized but will stretch during installation to ensure a tight fit. The initial installation of the cover is best performed when the winter cover is warm.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 09

Base Model

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 13

Base Model with License Plate

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 12

ST Model

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 11

ST Model with License Plate

  1. Center grille cover and make sure that it is positioned correctly.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 15Base Model with License Plate
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 17+ST Model
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 17+
    ST Model with License Plate
  2. Push plastic hooks back to engage grille slats.
  3. Repeat for all hooks to fully engage cover to grille.
  4. Make sure all clips remain engaged during installation. Cover should be stretched to a tight fit when properly installed.

Engine Heater

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 18

Warning
Do not plug in the engine block heater while the vehicle is parked in a garage or under a carport.
Property damage or personal injury may result. Always park the vehicle in a clear open area away from buildings or structures.

The engine heater, if available, can help in cold weather conditions at or below −18 °C (0 °F) for easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Plug in the engine heater at least four hours before starting the vehicle. An internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above −18 °C (0 °F).

To Use the Engine Heater

  1. Turn off the engine.
    Remove the heater cord from the rear compartment.
    Check the heater cord for damage. If it is damaged, do not use it. See your dealer for a replacement. Inspect the cord for damage yearly.
  2. Plug the cord into the receptacle in the front fascia.
  3. Plug the other end of the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

Warning
Improper use of the heater cord or an extension cord can damage the cord and may result in overheating and fire.

  • Plug the cord into a three-prong electrical utility receptacle that is protected by a ground fault detection function. An ungrounded outlet could cause an electric shock.
  • Use a weatherproof, heavy-duty, 15 amp-rated extension cord if needed. Failure to use the recommended extension cord in good operating condition, or using a damaged heater or extension cord, could make it overheat and cause a fire, property damage, electric shock, and injury.
  • Do not operate the vehicle with the heater cord permanently attached to the vehicle. Possible heater cord and thermostat damage could occur.
  • While in use, do not let the heater cord touch vehicle parts or sharp edges. Never close the hood on the heater cord.
  • Before starting the vehicle, unplug the cord, reattach the cover to the plug, and securely fasten the cord. Keep the cord away from any moving parts.

The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors. Ask a dealer in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
When the vehicle is turned from on to off, the following features (if equipped) will continue to function for up to 10 minutes, or until the driver door is opened. These features will also work when the vehicle is on or in accessory mode:

  • Infotainment System
  • Power Windows (during RAP this functionality will be lost when any door is opened)
  • Sunroof (during RAP this functionality will be lost when any door is opened)
  • Auxiliary Power Outlet
  • Audio System
  • OnStar System

Shifting Into Park
Warning
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured.

To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips page 239.

To shift into P (Park):

  1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake. See Electric Parking Brake 0 205
  2. Hold the button on the shift lever and push the lever toward the front of the vehicle into P (Park).
  3. Turn the vehicle off.

Leaving the Vehicle with the Engine Running
Warning

It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running. It could overheat and catch fire.
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the vehicle is not in P (Park) with the parking brake set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and shift to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park page199.
If you are towing a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips page 239.

If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle must be in P (Park) and the parking brake set.

Release the button and check that the shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and then it is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park). To find out how, see Shifting Into Park page  199 listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, the vehicle may need to be pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).
Shifting out of Park

To shift out of P (Park):

  1. Apply the brake pedal.
  2.  Turn the vehicle on.
  3.  Press the shift lever button.
  4. Move the shift lever.

If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):

  1.  Fully release the shift lever button.
  2. Hold the brake pedal down and press the shift lever button again.
  3. Move the shift lever.
    If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park), see your dealer for service.

Parking over Things That Burn
Warning
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that can burn.

Extended Parking

Extended Parking

It is best not to park with the vehicle running. If the vehicle is left running, be sure it will not move and there is adequate ventilation.

See Shifting Into Park 0 199 and Engine Exhaust 0 201.

If the vehicle is left parked and running with the remote key outside the vehicle, it will continue to run for up to 20 minutes.

If the vehicle is left parked and running with the remote key inside the vehicle, it will continue to run for up to 60 minutes.

The vehicle could turn off sooner if it is parked on a hill, due to lack of available fuel.

The timer will reset if the vehicle is taken out of P (Park) while it is running.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO), which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

  • The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation (parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
  • The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different.
  • The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage.
    The vehicle exhaust system has been modified, damaged, or improperly repaired.
  • There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or aftermarket modifications that are not completely sealed.

Warning (Continued)
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:

  • Drive it only with the windows completely down.
  • Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
    Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation.

Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running.

If the vehicle is left with the engine running, follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move. See Shifting Into Park 0 199 and

Engine Exhaust 0 201.

If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see

Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips

Automatic Transmission

P : This position locks the front wheels. Use P (Park) when starting the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily.

Warning
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the transmission is not in P (Park) with the parking brake set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running. If the engine has been left running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and place the transmission into P (Park). See Shifting Into Park page 199 and Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips page 239.

The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system. You must fully apply the regular brake first and then press the shift lever button before shifting from P (Park) when the ignition is on. If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift lever, then push the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting out of Park page 200.
R : Use this gear to back up

Caution
Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If the Vehicle Is Stuck page 189

N : In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.

Warning
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed.

Caution
Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.

Caution
A transmission hot message may display if the automatic transmission fluid is too hot.
Driving under this condition can damage the vehicle. Stop and idle the engine to cool the automatic transmission fluid. This message clears when the transmission fluid has cooled sufficiently.

D : This position is for normal driving
If more power is needed for passing, press the accelerator pedal down.

Caution
If the vehicle does not shift gears, the transmission could be damaged. Have the vehicle serviced right away.
Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission.
The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If the vehicle is stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

L : Allows the driver to select the range of gear positions. See Manual Mode page 203.

Operating Modes
The transmission may operate in a lower gear than normal to improve vehicle performance. The engine speed may be higher and there may be an increase in noise during the following conditions:

  • When climbing a grade .
  • When driving downhill.
  • When driving in hot temperatures or at high altitude.

Manual Mode
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Mode

ERS or manual mode allows for the selection of the range of gear positions. Use this mode when driving downhill or towing a trailer to limit the top gear and vehicle speed. The shift position indicator within the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a number next to the L indicating the highest available gear under manual mode and the driving conditions when manual mode was selected.

To use this feature:

  1. Move the shift lever to L (Manual Mode
  2. Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 20
  3. Press the plus/minus button on the shift lever, to increase or decrease the gear range available.
    When shifting to L (Manual Mode), the transmission will shift to a preset lower gear range. For this preset range, the highest gear available is displayed next to the L in the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) page 108 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) page 110 for more information. All gears below that number are available to use. For example, when 4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L, 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears areshifted automatically. To shift to 5 (Fifth) gear, press the + (Plus) button or shift into D (Drive).L (Manual Mode) will prevent shifting to a lower gear range if the engine speed is too high. If vehicle speed is not reduced within the time allowed, the lower gear range shift will not be completed. Slow the vehicle, then press the − (Minus) button to the desired lower gear range.While using the ERS, cruise control can be used.

    Drive Systems

    All-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature can operate in All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Mode.
    The AWD system delivers power to all four wheels and the system adjusts as needed to improve traction.

    Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 21Press the AWD button on the center console to activate the system. The AWD light will flash briefly while the system is engaging and stay lit to indicate AWD is active. Press the button again to disable the system. The light will flash briefly while the system disables and then stay off.
    The AWD Mode will stay selected until the mode is changed.
    When operated in two-wheel drive, the vehicle will deliver power to the front wheels only and may provide better fuel economy.
    When using a compact spare tire on an AWD vehicle, the system automatically detects the compact spare and reduces AWD

    performance to protect the system. To restore full AWD operation and prevent excessive wear on the system, replace the compact spare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. See Compact Spare Tire page 308.

    Brakes

    Electric Brake Boost
    Vehicles equipped with electric brake boost have hydraulic brake circuits that are electronically controlled when the brake pedal is applied during normal operation. The system performs routine tests and turns off within a few minutes after the vehicle is turned off. Noise may be heard during this time. If the brake pedal is pressed during the tests or when the electric brake boost system is off, a noticeable change in pedal force and travel may be felt. This is normal.

    Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 18Antilock Brake System (ABS)
    The Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps prevent a braking skid and maintain steering while braking hard.

Electric Brake Boost

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 22

The Electric Parking Brake (EPB) can always be applied, even if the vehicle is off. In case of insufficient electrical power, the EPB cannot be applied or released. To prevent draining the battery, avoid unnecessary repeated cycles of the EPB.

The system has a red parking brake status light and an amber service parking brake warning light. See Electric Parking Brake Light page 102 and Service Electric Parking Brake Light page 103. There are also parking brake-related Driver Information Center (DIC) message.

Before leaving the vehicle, check the red parking brake status light to ensure that the parking brake is applied.

EPB Apply

To apply the EPB:

  1. Be sure the vehicle is at a complete
  2. Pull the EPB switch

The red parking brake status light will flash and then stay on once the EPB is fully applied. If the red parking brake status light flashes continuously, the EPB is only partially applied or there is a problem with the EPB. A DIC message will display. Release the EPB and try to apply it again. If the light does not come on, or keeps flashing, have the vehicle serviced. Do not drive the vehicle if the red parking brake status light is flashing. See your dealer.

If the amber service parking brake warning light is on, pull the EPB switch. Continue to hold the switch until the red parking brake status light remains on. If the amber service parking brake warning light is on, see your dealer.

If the EPB is applied while the vehicle is moving, the vehicle will decelerate as long as the switch is pulled. If the switch is pulled until the vehicle comes to a stop, the EPB will remain applied.

The vehicle may automatically apply the EPB in some situations when the vehicle is not moving. This is normal, and is done to periodically check the correct operation of the EPB system, or at the request of other safety functions that utilize the EPB.

If the EPB fails to apply, block the rear wheels to prevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB:

  1. Turn the ignition on or to ACC
  2. Apply and hold the brake
  3. Press the EPB switch

The EPB is released when the red parking brake status light is off.

If the amber service parking brake warning light is on, release the EPB by pressing and holding the EPB switch. Continue to hold the switch until the red parking brake status light is off. If either light stays on after  release is attempted, see your dealer.

Caution
Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips page 239.

Automatic EPB Release
The EPB will automatically release if the vehicle is running, placed into gear, and an attempt is made to drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration when the EPB is applied, to preserve parking brake lining life.

Brake Assist
Brake Assist detects rapid brake pedal applications due to emergency braking situations and provides additional braking to activate the Antilock Brake System (ABS) if the brake pedal is not pushed hard enough to activate ABS normally. Minor noise, brake pedal pulsation, and/or pedal movement during this time may occur. Continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates. Brake Assist disengages when the brake pedal is released.

Warning
Do not rely on the HSA feature. HSA does not replace the need to pay attention and drive safely. You may not hear or feel alerts or warnings provided by this system. Failure to use proper care when driving may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. See Defensive Driving page 184.

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) and StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC), an electronic stability control system. These systems help limit wheel slip and assist the driver in maintaining control, especially on slippery road conditions.

TCS activates if it senses that any of the drive wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, TCS applies the brakes to the spinning wheels and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak/ESC activates when the vehicle senses a difference between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak/ESC selectively applies braking pressure to any one of the vehicle wheel brakes to assist the driver in keeping the vehicle on the intended path.
If cruise control is being used and TCS or StabiliTrak/ESC begins to limit wheel spin, cruise control will disengage. Cruise control may be turned back on when road conditions allow. TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC will automatically turn on when cruise control is set.
Both systems come on automatically when the vehicle is started and begins to move. The systems may be heard or felt while they are operating or while performing diagnostic checks. This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle.
It is recommended to leave both systems on for normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck page 189 and “Turning the Systems Off and On” later in this section.

uick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual59

The indicator light for both systems is in the instrument cluster. This light will:

  • Flash when TCS is limiting wheel spin .
  • Flash when StabiliTrak uick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual59ESC is activated .
  • Turn on and stay on when either system is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or to activate, a message displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC), and d comes on and stays on to indicate that the system is inactive and is not assisting the driver in maintaining control. The vehicle is safe to drive, but driving should be adjusted accordingly.

If uick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual59 comes on and stays on:

  1. Stop the vehicle .
  2. Turn the engine off and wait 15
  3. Start the engine .
  4. Drive the vehicle .

If uick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual59comes on and stays on, see your dealer.

Turning the Systems Off and On

Caution
Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate heavily when TCS is off. The vehicle driveline could be damaged.

 

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 24

To turn off only TCS, press and release g. The traction off light i illuminates in the instrument cluster.

To turn TCS on again, press and release g. The traction off light i in the instrument cluster will turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin when g is pressed, the system will not turn off until the wheels stop spinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC, press and hold g until the traction off light i and StabiliTrak/ESC OFF light g illuminate and stay on in the instrument cluster.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC on again, press and release g. The traction off light i and StabiliTrak/ESC OFF light g in the instrument cluster turn off.

Adding accessories can affect the vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications page 250

Cruise Control

The cruise control lets the vehicle maintain a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds below 40 km/h (25 mph).

Warning
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. Do not use cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.

With the Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC), the system may begin to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control. If this happens, the cruise control will automatically disengage. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control page 207.

If a collision alert occurs when cruise control is activated, cruise control is disengaged. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 227. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, cruise control can be turned back on.

Cruise control will disengage if either TCS or StabiliTrak/ESC is turned off.

If the brakes are applied, cruise control disengages.

If equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), the cruise control system may automatically brake to slow the vehicle down to maintain the set following gap between you and the vehicle in front of you or while navigating a sharp turn.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 25

Press to turn the cruise control system on and off. A white indicator comes on in the instrument cluster when cruise is turned on.

Press to disengage cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory.

+RES : If there is a set speed in memory, press up briefly to resume that speed or press and hold to accelerate. If cruise control is already active, use to increase vehicle speed.

−SET : Press down briefly to set the speed and activate cruise control. If cruise control is already active, use to decrease vehicle speed.

Setting Cruise Control

If 5 is on when not in use, −SET or +RES could get bumped and go into cruise when not desired. Keep 5 off when cruise is not being used.

To set a speed:

  1. Press 5 to turn the cruise system
  2. Get to the speed
  3. Press −SET down and release. The desired set speed briefly appears in the instrument cluster.
  4. Remove your foot from the accelerator

The cruise control indicator on the instrument cluster turns green after cruise control has been set to the desired speed. See Instrument Cluster page 93.

Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied or * is pressed, the cruise control is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory.
Once the vehicle reaches about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press RES+ up briefly. The vehicle returns to the previously set speed.

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control

Do one of the following:

  • Press and hold RES+ up until the vehicle accelerates to the desired speed, then release it.
  • To increase vehicle speed in small increments, press RES+ up briefly. For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Do one of the following:

  • Press and hold SET− down until the desired lower speed is reached, then release it.
  • To slow down in small increments, press SET− down briefly. For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.
  • Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the previously set cruise speed. While pressing the accelerator pedal or shortly following the release to override cruise control, briefly pressing SET− will result in cruise set to the current vehicle speed. Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control will work on hills depends upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. If the brake pedal is applied, cruise control will disengage.
  • Ending Cruise ControlThere are four ways to end cruise control:
    • Step lightly on the brake
    • Press *.
    • Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
    • To turn off cruise control, press 5.

     

  • Erasing Speed Memory
    The cruise control set speed is erased from memory if 5 is pressed or the ignition is turned off.

  • Adaptive Cruise Control (Camera)If equipped, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) allows the cruise control set speed and following gap to be selected. Read this entire section before using this system. The following gap is the following time between your vehicle and a vehicle detected directly ahead in your path, moving in the same direction. If no vehicle is detected in your path, ACC works like regular cruise control. ACC uses a windshield mounted front camera sensor.If a vehicle is detected in your path, ACC can apply acceleration or limited, moderate braking to maintain the selected following gap. To disengage ACC, apply the brake.If ACC is controlling the vehicle speed when the Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak/ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system activates, ACC may automatically disengage. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control page 207. When road conditions allow ACC to be safely used, ACC can be turned back on. Disabling the TCS or StabiliTrak/ ESC system will disengage and prevent engagement of ACC.ACC can reduce the need for you to frequently brake and accelerate, especially when used on expressways, freeways, and interstate highways. When used on other roads, you may need to take over the control of braking or acceleration more often.Warning
    ACC has limited braking ability and may not have time to slow the vehicle down enough to avoid a collision with another vehicle you are following. This can occur when vehicles suddenly slow or stop ahead, or enter your lane. Also see “Alerting the Driver” in this section.
  • Complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes. See Defensive Driving page 184 .

Warning
ACC will not detect or brake for children, pedestrians, animals, or other objects.
Do not use ACC when:

  • On winding and hilly roads or when the sensors are blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead. Keep the entire front of the vehicle clean.
  • Visibility is low, such as in fog, rain, or snow conditions. ACC performance is limited under these conditions.
  • On slippery roads where fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip.
  • When towing a trailer.
  • Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 24uick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual61Press to turn the system on or off. The indicator turns white on the instrument cluster when ACC is turned on.
  • RES+ : Press briefly to resume to a previous set speed or to increase vehicle speed if ACC is already activated. To increase speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press RES+ briefly. To increase speed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer, hold RES+.
  • SET– : Press briefly to set the speed and activate ACC or to decrease vehicle speed if ACC is already activated. To decrease speed by about 1 km/h (1 mph), press SET– briefly. To decrease speed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer, hold SET–.
  • Press to disengage ACC without erasing the selected set speed
    .Press to select a following gap time (or distance) setting for ACC of Far, Medium, or Near.
    The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster (Base Level) page 97 or Instrument Cluster (Uplevel) page 99. The increment value used depends on the units displayed.
  • Switching Between ACC and Regular Cruise Control
    To switch between ACC and regular cruise control, press and hold *. A Driver Information Center (DIC) message displays.
    See Vehicle Messages page 116.
  • Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 25
  • ACC Indicator
  • uick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual61
  • Regular Cruise Control Indicator
  • When ACC is engaged, a green o indicator will be lit on the instrument cluster. When the regular cruise control is engaged, a green J indicator will be lit on the instrument cluster; the following gap will not display.
    It is recommended to switch from ACC to regular cruise control only, when there are no vehicles ahead of your vehicle.
    When the vehicle is turned on, the cruise control mode will be set to the last mode used before the vehicle was turned off.

Warning
Always check the cruise control indicator on the instrument cluster to determine which mode cruise control is in before using the feature. If ACC is not active, the vehicle will not automatically brake for other vehicles, which could cause a crash if the brakes are not applied manually. You and others could be seriously injured or killed.

Setting Adaptive Cruise Control
Ifuick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual61 is on when not in use, it could get pressed and go into ACC when not desired. Keep uick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual61 off when cruise is not being used.

Select the set speed desired for ACC. This is the vehicle speed when no vehicle is detected in its path.
While the vehicle is moving, ACC will not set at a speed less than 25 km/h (15 mph), although it can be resumed when driving at lower speeds. The minimum allowable set speed is 25 km/h (15 mph).

To set ACC while moving:

  1. Press uick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual61.
  2.  Get up to the desired speed.
  3. Press and release SET–.
  4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

After ACC is set, it may immediately apply the brakes if a vehicle ahead is detected closer than the selected following gap.

  • Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 25

ACC can also be set while the vehicle is stopped if ACC is on and the brake pedal is applied.

The ACC indicator displays on the instrument cluster and Head-Up Display (HUD), if equipped. When ACC is turned on, the indicator will be lit white. When ACC is active, the indicator will turn green.
Be mindful of speed limits, surrounding traffic speeds, and weather conditions when selecting the set speed.

Resuming a Set Speed
If ACC is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied, ACC is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory.

To begin using ACC again, press RES+ up briefly.

    • If the vehicle is moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph), it returns to the previous set speed .
    • If the vehicle is stopped with the brake pedal applied, press RES+ and release the brake pedal. ACC will hold the vehicle until RES+ or the accelerator pedal is

Once ACC has resumed, the vehicle speed will increase to the set speed under the following conditions:

  • There is no vehicle
  • The vehicle ahead is beyond the selected following gap.
  • The vehicle speed is not being limited because of a sharp turn.

Increasing Speed While ACC is at a Set Speed

If ACC is already activated, do one of the following:

  • Use the accelerator to get to the higher Briefly press and release SET– and release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will now cruise at the higher speed.
    When the accelerator pedal is pressed, ACC will not brake because it is overridden. While overridden, the ACC indicator will turn blue on the instrument cluster and HUD, if equipped.
  • Press and hold up RES+ until the desired set speed is displayed, then release it.
  • To increase vehicle speed in small increments, press RES+ For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) faster.
  • To increase vehicle speed in larger increments, hold RES+. While holding RES+, the vehicle speed increases to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) step, then continues to increase by 5 km/h (5 mph) at a time.
  • The set speed can also be increased while the vehicle is stopped.
    • If stopped with the brake applied, press RES+ until the desired set speed is displayed .
    • If ACC is holding the vehicle at a stop and there is another vehicle directly ahead, pressing RES+ will increase the set speed.
    • Pressing RES+ when there is no longer a vehicle ahead or the vehicle ahead is pulling away and the brake is not applied will cause the ACC to resume.

    When it is determined that there is no vehicle ahead or the vehicle ahead is beyond the selected following gap, then the vehicle speed will increase to the set speed.

Reducing Speed While ACC is at a Set Speed
If ACC is already activated, do one of the following:

  • Use the brake to get to the desired lower Release the brake and press SET–. The vehicle will now cruise at the lower speed.
  • Press and hold SET– until the desired lower speed is reached, then release
  • To decrease the vehicle speed in smaller increments, press SET− For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.
  • To decrease the vehicle speed in larger increments, hold SET−. While holding SET−, the vehicle speed decreases to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) step, then continues to decrease by 5 km/h (5 mph) at a time.

The set speed can also be decreased while the vehicle is stopped.

  • If stopped with the brake applied, press or hold SET− until the desired set speed is displayed.
  • Selecting the Follow Distance Gap
    When a slower moving vehicle is detected ahead within the selected following gap, ACC will adjust the vehicle’s speed and attempt to maintain the follow distance gap selected.
    Press on the steering wheel to adjust the following gap. Each press cycles the gap button through three settings: Far, Medium, or Near.
  • Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 44
  • Far Gap Setting
  • Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 45
  • Medium Gap Setting
  • Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 27
  • Near Gap Setting
  • When pressed, the current gap setting displays briefly on the instrument cluster and HUD, if equipped. The gap setting will be maintained until it is changed .Since each gap setting
  • corresponds to a following time (Far, Medium, or Near), the following distance will vary based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed, the further back your vehicle will follow a vehicle detected ahead. Consider traffic and weather conditions when selecting the following gap. The range of selectable gaps may not be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions.
  • Changing the gap setting automatically changes the alert timing sensitivity (Far, Medium, or Near) for the Forward Collision Alert (FCA) feature. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System page 227.
  • Alerting the Driver
  • Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 28
  • Without Head-Up Display
  • Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 29
  • With Head-Up Display Screen Closed
  • Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 30
  • With Head-Up Display Screen Open
  • If ACC is engaged, driver action may be required when ACC cannot apply sufficient braking because of approaching a vehicle too rapidly.
    When this condition occurs, the red collision alert symbol will flash on the windshield or on the HUD, if equipped. Eight beeps will sound from the front.
    See Defensive Driving page 184.
  • Approaching and Following a Vehicle
  • Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 60The vehicle ahead indicator is in the instrument cluster and HUD display (If equipped). It only displays when a vehicle is detected in your vehicle’s path moving inthe same direction. If this symbol is not displaying, ACC will not respond to or brake for vehicles ahead.ACC automatically slows the vehicle down and adjusts vehicle speed to follow a detected vehicle ahead at the selected following gap. The vehicle speed increases or decreases to follow a detected vehicle in front of your vehicle. When that vehicle is traveling slower than your vehicle set speed, it may apply limited braking, if necessary. When braking is active, the brake lamps will come on. The automatic braking may feel or sound different than if the brakes were applied manually. This is normal.Passing a Vehicle While Using ACC If the set speed is high enough, and the left turn signal is used to pass a vehicle ahead in the selected following gap, ACC may assist by gradually accelerating the vehicle prior to the lane change.

Warning
When using ACC to pass a vehicle or perform a lane change, the following distance to the vehicle being passed may be reduced. ACC may not apply sufficient acceleration or braking when passing a vehicle or performing a lane change. Always be ready to manually accelerate or brake to complete the pass or lane change.

Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects
Warning
ACC may not detect and react to stopped or slow-moving vehicles ahead of you. For example, the system may not brake for a vehicle it has never detected moving. This can occur in stop-and-go traffic or when a vehicle suddenly appears due to a vehicle ahead changing lanes. Your vehicle may not stop and could cause a crash. Use caution when using ACC. Your complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes.

Irregular Objects Affecting ACC
ACC may have difficulty detecting the following objects:

  • Vehicles in front of your vehicle that have a rear aspect that is low, small, or irregular
  • An empty truck or trailer that has no cargo in the cargo bed
  • Vehicles with cargo extending from the back end
  • Non-standard shaped vehicles, such as vehicle transport, vehicles with a side car fitted, or horse carriages
  • Vehicles that are low to the road surface
  • Objects that are close to the front of your vehicle
  • Vehicles on which extremely heavy cargo is loaded in the cargo area or rear seat
  • Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 31
  • ACC Automatically Disengages
    ACC may automatically disengage and you will need to manually apply the brakes to slow the vehicle if:

    • The sensors are blocked .
    • The Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak/ESC system has activated or been disabled.
    • There is a fault in the system .
    • The radar falsely reports blockage when driving in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles or roadside objects.
    • A DIC message may display to indicate that ACC is temporarily unavailable.

    The ACC active symbol will turn white when ACC is no longer active.

    In some cases, when ACC is temporarily unavailable, regular cruise control may be used. See “Switching Between ACC and Regular Cruise Control” in this section.

    Always consider driving conditions before using either cruise control system.

    Notification to Resume ACC
    ACC will maintain a following gap behind a detected vehicle and slow your vehicle to a stop behind that vehicle.

    If the stopped vehicle ahead has driven away and ACC has not resumed, the vehicle ahead indicator will flash as a reminder to check traffic ahead before proceeding. In addition, the left and right sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse three times, or three beeps will sound. Touch the Settings icon on the infotainment home page. Select “Vehicle” to display the list of available options and select ”Alert Type” and “Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier” in “Collision/ Detection Systems”.

    When the vehicle ahead drives away, ACC resumes automatically if the stop was brief. If necessary, press RES+ or the accelerator pedal to resume ACC. If stopped for more than two minutes or if the driver door is opened and the driver seat belt is unbuckled, the ACC automatically applies the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle. The EPB status light will turn on.

    See Electric Parking Brake page 205 . To release the EPB, press the accelerator pedal.

    A DIC warning message may display indicating to shift to P (Park) before exiting the vehicle. See Vehicle Messages page 116.

    Warning
    If ACC has stopped the vehicle, and if ACC is disengaged, turned off, or canceled, the vehicle will no longer be held at a stop. The vehicle can move. When ACC is holding the vehicle at a stop, always be prepared to manually apply the brakes.
    Leaving the vehicle without placing it in P (Park) can be dangerous. Do not leave the vehicle while it is being held at a stop by ACC. Always place the vehicle in P (Park) and turn off the ignition before leaving the vehicle.

    ACC Override
    If using the accelerator pedal while ACC is active, the ACC indicator turns blue on the instrument cluster and in the HUD, if equipped, to indicate that automatic braking will not occur. ACC will resume operation when the accelerator pedal is not being pressed.

    Warning
    The ACC will not automatically apply the brakes if your foot is resting on the accelerator pedal. You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you.

    Curves in the Road
    Warning
    On curves, ACC may not detect a vehicle ahead in your lane. You could be startled if the vehicle accelerates up to the set speed, especially when following a vehicle exiting or entering exit ramps. You could lose control of the vehicle or crash. Do not use ACC while driving on an entrance or exit ramp. Always be ready to use the brakes if necessary.

    Warning
    On curves, ACC may respond to a vehicle in another lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle in your lane. You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you, or lose control of your vehicle. Give extra attention in curves and be ready to use the brakes if necessary. Select an appropriate speed while driving in curves.
    ACC may operate differently in a sharp curve. It may reduce the vehicle speed if the curve is too sharp.
    ACC automatically slows the vehicle down while navigating the curve and may increase speed out of the curve, but will not exceed the set speed.

  • Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 27When following a vehicle and entering a curve, ACC may not detect the vehicle ahead and accelerate to the set speed. When this happens, the vehicle ahead indicator will not appear.Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 28ACC may detect a vehicle that is not in your lane and apply the brake .ACC may occasionally provide an alert and/ or braking that is considered unnecessary.
    It could respond to vehicles in different lanes, signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects when entering or exiting a curve.
    This is normal operation. The vehicle does not need service.Other Vehicle Lane change 

    Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 29

    ACC will not detect a vehicle ahead until it is completely in the lane. The brake may need to be manually applied.

    Objects Not Directly in Front of Your Vehicle

    The detection of objects in front of the vehicle may not be possible if:

    • The vehicle or object ahead is not within your lane.
    • The vehicle ahead is shifted, not centered, or is shifted to one side of the lane.

     

    Driving in Narrow Lanes
    Vehicles in adjacent traffic lanes or roadside objects may be incorrectly detected when located along the roadway.

    Do Not Use ACC on Hills and When Towing a Trailer

    Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 30

    Do not use ACC when driving on steep hills or when towing a trailer. ACC will not detect a vehicle in the lane while driving on steep hills. The driver will often need to take over acceleration and braking on steep hills, especially when towing a trailer. If the brakes are applied, the ACC disengages.

    Disengaging ACC
    There are three ways to disengage ACC:

    • Step lightly on the brake
    • Press *.
    • Pressuick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual61

    Erasing Speed Memory
    The cruise control set speed is erased from memory if 5 is pressed or if the ignition is turned off.

    Weather Conditions Affecting ACC
    If the interior temperature is extremely high, the instrument cluster may indicate that ACC is temporarily unavailable. This can be caused by extreme hot weather conditions with direct sunlight on the front camera. ACC will return to normal operation once the cabin temperature is lower.
    Conditions that are associated with low visibility, such as fog, rain, snow, or road spray, may limit ACC performance. Water droplets from rain or snow that remain on the windshield may also limit ACC’s ability to detect objects.

  • Warning
    Camera visibility may be limited and the ACC system may not work properly if the windshield is not clear. Do not use ACC if moisture is present on the inside of the windshield or the windshield washer is used in cold weather. Turn on the front defroster and make sure the windshield is clear before using ACC. Before driving, check that the windshield wipers are in good condition and replace them if worn.
  • Lighting Conditions Affecting ACCThe ACC front camera can be affected by poor lighting conditions, and ACC may have limited performance when:
    • There are changes in brightness, such as entering and exiting tunnels, bridges, and
    • Low sun angles cause the camera to not detect objects, or it is more difficult to detect objects in the same traffic lane.
    • Lighting is poor in the evening or early morning
    • There are multiple changes in brightness or shadows along the vehicle roadway.
    • In a tunnel without the headlamps on, or in a tunnel when there is a vehicle in front that does not have its taillamps on.
    • Subjected to strong light from opposing lane traffic in the front of the vehicle, such as high-beam headlamps from oncoming traffic.

     

Accessory Installations and Vehicle Modifications
Do not install or place any object around the front camera windshield area that would obstruct the front camera view.

Do not install objects on top of the vehicle that overhang and obstruct the front camera, such as a canoe, kayak, or other items that can be transported on a roof rack system. See Roof Rack System page 82.

Do not modify the hood, headlamps, or fog lamps, as this may limit the camera’s ability to detect an object.

Cleaning the Sensing System
The radar sensor on the front of the vehicle can become blocked by snow, ice, dirt, or mud. This area needs to be cleaned for ACC to operate properly.

If ACC will not operate, regular cruise control may be available. See “Switching Between ACC and Regular Cruise Control” previously in this section. Always consider driving conditions before using either cruise control system.

For cleaning instructions, see “Washing the Vehicle” under Exterior Care page 315 .

Driver Assistance Systems

This vehicle may have features that work together to help avoid crashes or reduce crash damage while driving, backing, and parking. Read this entire section before using these systems.

Warning
Do not rely on the Driver Assistance Systems. These systems do not replace the need for paying attention and driving safely. You may not hear or feel alerts or warnings provided by these systems. Failure to use proper care when driving may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. See Defensive Driving page 184.

Under many conditions, these systems will not:

  • Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
    Detect vehicles or objects outside the area monitored by the system.
    Work at all driving speeds.
  • Warn you or provide you with enough time to avoid a crash.
  • Work under poor visibility or bad weather conditions.
  • Work if the detection sensor is not cleaned or is covered by ice, snow, mud, or dirt.
  • Work if the detection sensor is covered up, such as with a sticker, magnet, or metal plate.
  • Work if the area surrounding the detection sensor is damaged or not properly repaired.
  • Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes.
  • Audible or Safety Alert Seat
    Some driver assistance features alert the driver of obstacles by beeping. To view available settings for this feature, touch the Settings icon on the infotainment home page. Select “Vehicle” to display the list of available options and select “Comfort and Convenience”.If equipped with the Safety Alert Seat, the driver seat cushion may provide a vibrating pulse alert instead of beeping. To view available settings for this feature, touch the Settings icon on the infotainment home page. Select “Vehicle” to display the list of available options and select “Collision/ Detection Systems”.Cleaning
    Depending on vehicle options, keep these areas of the vehicle clean to ensure the best driver assistance feature performance. Driver Information Center (DIC) messages may display when the systems are unavailable or blocked.

Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 31 Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 32

  • Front and rear bumpers and the area
  • below the bumpers
  • Front grille and headlamps
  • Front camera lens in the front grille or near the front emblem .
  • Front side and rear side panels
  • Outside of the windshield in front of the rearview mirror
  • Side camera lens on the bottom of the outside mirrors
  • Rear side corner bumpers
  • Rear Vision Camera above the license plate

Radio Frequency
This vehicle may be equipped with driver assistance systems that operate using radio frequency. See Radio Frequency Statement page 314.

Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing
If equipped, the Rear Vision Camera (RVC), Surround Vision, Rear Park Assist (RPA), Front and Rear Park Assist (FRPA), and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) may help the driver park or avoid objects. Always check around the vehicle when parking or backing.

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
When the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse), the Rear Vision Camera (RVC) displays an image of the area behind the vehicle in the infotainment display. The previous screen displays when the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) after a short delay. To return to the previous screen sooner, press Home or Back on the infotainment system, shift into P (Park), or reach a vehicle speed of approximately 12 km/h (8 mph) while in D (Drive ).
Select Front or Rear Camera to view the front or rear camera views. Select Guidance Lines on the camera screen to enable or disable the guidance lines.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 33

  1. View Displayed by the CameraBuick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 34View Displayed by the Camera
    Corners of the Rear Bumper

Displayed images may be farther or closer than they appear. The area displayed is limited and objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper do not display.

A warning triangle may appear on the infotainment display to show that Rear Park Assist (RPA) or Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) has detected an object. This triangle changes from amber to red and increases in size the closer the object.

Warning
The camera(s) do not display children, pedestrians, bicyclists, crossing traffic, animals, or any other object outside of the cameras’ field of view, below the bumper, or under the vehicle. Shown distances may be different from actual distances. Do not drive or park the vehicle using only these camera(s). Always check behind and around the vehicle before driving. Failure to use proper care may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage.

Surround Vision System
If equipped, Surround Vision shows an image of the area surrounding the vehicle, along with the front or rear camera views on the infotainment display. The front camera is in the grille or near the front emblem, the side cameras are on the bottom of the outside mirrors, and the rear camera is above the license plate.
The Surround Vision system can be accessed by selecting CAMERA in the infotainment display or when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). To return to the previous screen sooner, when not in R (Reverse) press Home or Back on the infotainment system, shift  into P (Park), or reach a vehicle speed of approximately 12 km/h (8 mph) while in D (Drive).

Warning
The Surround Vision cameras have blind spots and will not display all objects near the corners of the vehicle. Folding outside mirrors that are out of position may not display surround view correctly. Always check around the vehicle when parking or backing.

Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 35

  1. Views Displayed by the Surround Vision Cameras
  2. Area Not Shown

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual35

  1. Views Displayed by the Surround Vision Cameras
  2. Area Not Shown

Camera Views

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 36

Touch the camera view buttons along the bottom of the infotainment display. Available views will differ depending on vehicle options.

Front/Rear Standard View : Displays an image of the area in front or behind the vehicle. Touch Front/Rear Standard View on the infotainment display when a camera view is active. Touching the button multiple times will toggle between front and rear camera views.

Front/Rear Overhead View : Displays a Front or Rear Overhead View of the vehicle.

Touching the button will toggle between the two views.

Side Forward/Rearward View : Displays a view that shows objects next to the front or rear sides of the vehicle. Touch Side Forward/Rearward View on the infotainment display when a camera view is active.

Touching the button multiple times will toggle between forward and rearward views. Park Assist and RCTA overlays are not available when Side Forward/Rearward View is active.

Guidance Lines : Displays available guidelines. The horizontal markings represent distance from the vehicle.

Top Down View : Displays an image of the area surrounding the vehicle, along with other views in the infotainment display. Top Down can be enabled or disabled by touching the Top Down View button multiple times.

Park Assist

If equipped with Rear Park Assist (RPA) and Front Park Assist (FPA), as the vehicle moves at speeds of less than 8 km/h (5 mph) the sensors on the bumpers may detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle and 1.2 m (4 ft) in front of the vehicle within a zone 25 cm (10 in) off the ground and below bumper level. These detection distances may be shorter during warmer or humid weather.
Blocked sensors will not detect objects and can also cause false detections. Keep the sensors clean of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush; and clean sensors after a car wash in freezing temperature.

Warning
The Park Assist system does not detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, or objects located below the bumper or that are too close or too far from the vehicle. It is not available at speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To prevent injury, death, or vehicle damage, even with Park Assist, always check the area around the vehicle and check all mirrors before moving forward or backing.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 37

The instrument cluster may have a Park Assist display with bars that show “distance to object” and object location information for the Park Assist system. As the object gets closer, more bars light up and the bars will change color from yellow, to amber, to red.
When an object is first detected in the rear, one beep will sound from the rear. When an object is very close (< 0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear, or < 0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front), five beeps will sound from the front or rear depending on object location. Beeps for FPA are higher pitched than for RPA

Turning the Features On or Off
To turn Park Assist on or off, press X on the center console. The indicator light next to the button comes on when the features are on and turns off when the features have been disabled.
RPA symbols can be turned on or off through vehicle personalization. To view a list of available options from the infotainment home page, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision Detection Systems.
Turn off RPA when towing a trailer.

Automatic Parking Assist (APA)
If equipped, APA searches for and steers the vehicle into parallel and perpendicular parking spots. When using APA, you must still shift gears, while the system applies the brakes and accelerator. A display and audible beeps help to guide parking maneuvers.
Do not use APA when towing a trailer.

Warning
APA may not detect objects in the parking space, objects that are soft or narrow, objects high off the ground such as flatbed trucks, objects below ground level such as large potholes, or moving objects (e.g. pedestrians). Always verify that the parking space is appropriate for parking a vehicle. APA does not respond to changes in the parking space, such as movement of an adjacent vehicle, or a person or object entering the parking space. APA does not detect or avoid traffic that is behind or alongside of the vehicle. Always be prepared to stop the vehicle during the parking maneuver.
Press switch O on the center console to enable the system to search for a parking space that is large enough and within 1.5 m (5 ft) of the vehicle. The vehicle speed must be below 30 km/h (18 mph). The system cannot:

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 38

Detect whether it is a legal parking
Park exactly lined up with the vehicle next to it if the spot is approached at an angle or if the parking space is angled.

    • Park exactly centered in a spot that is marked too large.
    • Always detect short

    When enabled, APA searches for parallel parking spaces to the right of the vehicle. To search for a parking space to the left, turn on the left turn signal or, if available, change the side selection in the infotainment display.

  • After completely passing a large enough space, an audible beep occurs.A red stop symbol and a shift to reverse message are displayed .
  • If the vehicle is in R (Reverse), but does not steer into the expected space, this may be because the system is maneuvering the vehicle into a previously detected space. The APA system does not need service .

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual39

APA will instruct the vehicle to stop once a large enough space is found.

Follow the displayed instructions.
Shift to R (Reverse) to engage automatic steering. The steering wheel will vibrate briefly as a reminder to remove hands from the steering wheel. APA uses idle speed and braking to park. If idle speed is not sufficient, gently press the accelerator.

Check surroundings and be prepared to stop to avoid vehicles, pedestrians, or objects not detected by the system.
In case the driver brakes, APA will not disengage. Manual steering by the driver automatically disengages APA.

Vehicle speed is limited to a maximum of 5 km/h (3 mph) during the parking maneuver.
A progress arrow displays the status of the parking maneuver. Depending on the space size, additional maneuvers may be required, and there will be additional instructions.
When changing gears, allow the automatic steering to complete before continuing the parking maneuver. APA will beep and display a PARKING COMPLETE message.

Apply the brakes and place the vehicle in P (Park).

APA may automatically disengage if:

  • The steering wheel is used by the driver .
  • The maximum allowed speed is exceeded .
  • The parking brake is applied or the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
  • There is a failure with the APA system .
  • Electronic stability control or antilock brakes are activated.
  • A high priority vehicle message is displayed in the DIC.
  • The driver opens the door with an unbuckled seat belt.

The brake holds the vehicle until the parking brake or brake is applied, or the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

To cancel APA, press  again.

When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly
The APA system may require a short period of driving along curves to calibrate.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) System
If equipped, when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse), RCTA displays a red warning triangle with a left or right pointing arrow on the infotainment display to warn of traffic coming from the left or right. This system detects objects coming from up to 20 m (65 ft) from the left or right side of the vehicle. When an object is detected, either three beeps sound from the left or right depending on the direction of the detected vehicle.

Use caution while backing up when towing a trailer, as the RCTA detection zones that extend out from the back of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed.

Turning the Features On or Off
RCTA can be turned on or off through vehicle personalization. To view available settings for this feature, touch the Settings icon on the infotainment home page. Select “Vehicle” to display the list of available options and select “Collision/Detection Systems.

Assistance Systems for Driving
If equipped, when driving the vehicle in a forward gear, Forward Collision Alert (FCA), Lane Departure Warning (LDW), Lane Keep Assist (LKA), Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA), Lane Change Alert (LCA), Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB), and/or the Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System can help to avoid a crash or reduce crash damage.

Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System
If equipped, the FCA system may help to avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes. When approaching a vehicle ahead too quickly, FCA provides a red flashing alert on the windshield and rapidly beeps or pulses the driver seat. FCA also lights an amber visual alert if following another vehicle much too closely.

FCA detects vehicles within a distance of approximately 60 m (197 ft) and operates at speeds above 8 km/h (5 mph).

Warning
FCA is a warning system and does not apply the brakes. When approaching a slower-moving or stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly, or when following a vehicle too closely, FCA may not provide a warning with enough time to help avoid a crash. It also may not provide any warning at all. FCA does not warn of pedestrians, animals, signs, guardrails, bridges, construction barrels, or other objects. Be ready to take action and apply the brakes. See Defensive Driving page 184.

FCA can be disabled through vehicle settings. To view available settings for this feature, touch the Settings icon on the infotainment home page. Select “Vehicle” to display the list of available options and select “Collision/ Detection Systems

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

  • Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 60

FCA warnings will not occur unless the FCA system detects a vehicle ahead. When a vehicle is detected, the vehicle ahead indicator will display green. Vehicles may not be detected on curves, highway exit ramps, or hills, due to poor visibility; or if a vehicle ahead is partially blocked by pedestrians or other objects. FCA will not detect another vehicle ahead until it is completely in the driving lane.

Warning

  • FCA does not provide a warning to help avoid a crash, unless it detects a vehicle. FCA may not detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the windshield is damaged. It may also not detect a vehicle on winding or hilly roads, or in conditions that can limit visibility such as fog, rain, or snow, or if the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper condition. Keep the windshield, headlamps, and FCA sensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert

Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 26

If Head-Up Display (HUD) is not equipped, when your vehicle approaches another detected vehicle too rapidly, the red FCA display will flash on the windshield.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 29If Head-Up Display (HUD) is equipped and the screen is closed, when your vehicle approaches another detected vehicle too rapidly, the HUD with the integrated RLAD can display red spots reflected in the windshield.

  • Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 30
  • If Head-Up Display (HUD) is equipped and the screen is open, when your vehicle approaches another detected vehicle too rapidly, the HUD can display indicator on the screen as the FCA display.
    Also, eight rapid high-pitched beeps will sound from the front. When this Collision Alert occurs, the brake system may prepare for driver braking to occur more rapidly which can cause a brief, mild deceleration. Continue to apply the brake pedal as needed. Cruise control may be disengaged when the Collision Alert occurs.

Tailgating Alert

  • Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 60
  • The vehicle ahead indicator will display amber when you are following a vehicle ahead too closely.
  • Selecting the Alert Timing

Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual41

The Collision Alert control is on the steering wheel. PresBuick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual41  to set the FCA timing to Far, Medium, or Near. The first button press shows the current setting on the DIC. Additional button presses will change this setting. The chosen setting will remain until it is changed and will affect the timing of both the Collision Alert and the Tailgating Alert features. The timing of both alerts will vary based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed, the farther away the alert will occur. Consider traffic and weather conditions when selecting the alert timing. The range of selectable alert timings may not be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions.
If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), changing the FCA timing setting automatically changes the following gap setting (Far, Medium, or Near).

Following Distance Indicator
The following distance to a moving vehicle ahead in your path is indicated in following time in seconds on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) page 113 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) page 108. The minimum following time is seconds away. If there is no vehicle detected ahead, or the vehicle ahead is out of sensor range, dashes will be displayed.

Unnecessary Alerts
FCA may provide unnecessary alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles in other lanes, objects that are not vehicles, or shadows. These alerts are normal operation and the vehicle does not need service.

Cleaning the System
If the FCA system does not seem to operate properly, this may correct the issue:

  • Clean the outside of the windshield in front of the rearview mirror.
  • Clean the entire front of the vehicle .
  • Clean the headlamps.

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
If equipped, the AEB system may help avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes. AEB also includes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA). When the system detects a vehicle ahead in your path that is traveling in the same direction that you may be about to crash into, it can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle. This can help avoid or lessen the severity of crashes when driving in a forward gear. Depending on the situation, the vehicle may automatically brake moderately or hard. This automatic emergency braking can only occur if a vehicle is detected. This is shown by the FCA vehicle ahead indicator being lit. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System page 227 .

The system works when driving in a forward gear between 8 km/h (5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph), or on vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), above 4 km/h (2 mph). It can detect vehicles up to approximately  60 m (197 ft).

Warning
AEB is an emergency crash preparation feature and is not designed to avoid crashes. Do not rely on AEB to brake the vehicle. AEB will not brake outside of its operating speed range and only responds to detected vehicles.
AEB may not:

  • Detect a vehicle ahead on winding or hilly roads.
    Detect all vehicles, especially vehicles with a trailer, tractors, muddy vehicles, etc.
  • Detect a vehicle when weather limits visibility, such as in fog, rain, or snow.
    Detect a vehicle ahead if it is partially blocked by pedestrians or other objects.

Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes.

AEB may slow the vehicle to a complete stop to try to avoid a potential crash. If this happens, AEB may engage the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop. Release the EPB or firmly press the accelerator pedal .

Warning
AEB may automatically brake the vehicle suddenly in situations where it is unexpected and undesired. It could respond to a turning vehicle ahead, guardrails, signs, and other non-moving objects. To override AEB, firmly press the accelerator pedal, if it is safe to do so.

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)
IBA may activate when the brake pedal is applied quickly by providing a boost to braking based on the speed of approach and distance to a vehicle ahead.

Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal and the brake pedal should continue to be applied as needed. IBA will automatically disengage only when the brake pedal is released.

Warning
IBA may increase vehicle braking in situations when it may not be necessary. You could block the flow of traffic. If this occurs, take your foot off the brake pedal and then apply the brakes as needed.

AEB and IBA can be disabled through vehicle settings. To view available settings for this feature, touch the Settings icon on the infotainment home page. Select “Vehicle” to display the list of available options and select “Collision/Detection system.

Warning
Using AEB or IBA while towing a trailer could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and crash. Turn the system to Alert or Off when towing a trailer.

A system unavailable message may display if:

  • The front of the vehicle or windshield is not clean.
  • Heavy rain or snow is interfering with object detection.
  • There is a problem with the StabiliTrak/ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.

The AEB system does not need service.

Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System

Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System

If equipped, the FPB system may help avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes with nearby pedestrians when driving in a forward gear. FPB displays an amber indicator, Buick Enclave 2023 Instruments and Controls User Manual 62when a nearby pedestrian is detected ahead. The indicator may also be white depending on the equipped instrument cluster. See Instrument Cluster page 93. When approaching a detected pedestrian too quickly, FPB provides a red flashing alert on the windshield and rapidly beeps. FPB can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle. This system includes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA), and the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system may also respond to pedestrians.
See Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) page  229.

The FPB system can detect and alert to pedestrians in a forward gear at speeds between 8 km/h (5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph). During daytime driving, the system detects pedestrians up to a distance of approximately 40 m (131 ft). During nighttime driving, system performance is very limited.

Warning
FPB does not provide an alert or automatically brake the vehicle, unless it detects a pedestrian. FPB may not detect pedestrians, including children:

  • When the pedestrian is not directly ahead, fully visible, or standing upright, or when part of a group.
  • Due to poor visibility, including nighttime conditions, fog, rain, or snow.
  • If the FPB sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice.
    If the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper condition.
    Be ready to take action and apply the brakes. For more information, see Defensive Driving page 184 . Keep the windshield, headlamps, and FPB sensor clean and in good repair.

FPB can be set to Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake through vehicle settings. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/ Detection Systems.

Detecting the Pedestrian Ahead

Buick Enclave 2023 Instruments and Controls User Manual 62

FPB alerts and automatic braking will not occur unless the FPB system detects a pedestrian. When a nearby pedestrian is detected in front of the vehicle, the pedestrian ahead indicator will display amber or white depending on the equipped instrument cluster. See Instrument Cluster page 93

Front Pedestrian Alert

Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 26

If Head-Up Display (HUD) is not equipped, when the vehicle approaches a pedestrian ahead too rapidly, the red FPB alert display will flash on the windshield.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 29

If Head-Up Display (HUD) is equipped and the screen is closed, when the vehicle approaches a pedestrian ahead too rapidly, the HUD with the integrated RLAD can display red spots reflected in the windshield.

Buick Enclave 2023 Instruments and Controls User Manual 62

If Head-Up Display (HUD) is equipped and the screen is open, when the vehicle approaches a pedestrian ahead too rapidly, the HUD can display indicator on the screen.

Eight rapid high-pitched beeps will sound from the front. When this Pedestrian Alert occurs, the brake system may prepare for driver braking to occur more rapidly which can cause a brief, mild deceleration.

Continue to apply the brake pedal as needed. Cruise control may be disengaged when the Front Pedestrian Alert occurs.

Automatic Braking
If FPB detects it is about to crash into a pedestrian directly ahead, and the brakes have not been applied, FPB may automatically brake moderately or brake hard. This can help to avoid some very low speed pedestrian crashes or reduce pedestrian injury. FPB can automatically brake to detected pedestrians between 8 km/h (5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph).

Automatic braking levels may be reduced under certain conditions, such as higher speeds.

If this happens, Automatic Braking may engage the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop. Release the EPB. A firm press of the accelerator pedal will also release Automatic Braking and the EPB.

Warning
FPB may alert or automatically brake the vehicle suddenly in situations where it is unexpected and undesired. It could falsely alert or brake for objects similar in shape or size to pedestrians, including shadows. This is normal operation and the vehicle does not need service. To override Automatic Braking, firmly press the accelerator pedal, if it is safe to do so.

Automatic Braking can be disabled through vehicle settings. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Setting Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems > Front Pedestrian Detection.

Warning
Using the Front Pedestrian Braking system while towing a trailer could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and crash. Turn the system to Alert or Off when towing a trailer.

Cleaning the System
If FPB does not seem to operate properly, cleaning the outside of the windshield in front of the rearview mirror may correct the issue.

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
If equipped, the SBZA system is a lane-changing aid that assists drivers with avoiding crashes that occur with moving vehicles in the side blind zone, or blind spot areas. When the vehicle is in a forward gear, the left or right side mirror display will light up if a moving vehicle is detected in that blind zone. If the turn signal is activated and a vehicle is also detected on the same side, the display will flash as an extra warning not to change lanes. Since this system is part of the Lane Change Alert (LCA) system, read the entire LCA section before using this feature.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)
If equipped, the LCA system is a lane-changing aid that assists drivers with avoiding lane change crashes that occur with moving vehicles in the side blind zone (or spot) areas or with vehicles rapidly approaching these areas from behind. The LCA warning display will light up in the corresponding outside mirror and will flash if the turn signal is on .

Warning
LCA does not alert the driver to vehicles outside of the system detection zones, pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. It may not provide alerts when changing lanes under all driving conditions. Failure to use proper care when changing lanes may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. Before making a lane change, always check mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the turn signals.

LCA Detection Zones

Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual42

  1. SBZA Detection Zone
  2. LCA Detection Zone

The LCA sensor covers a zone of approximately one lane over from both sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m (11 ft). The height of the zone is approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. The Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) warning area starts at approximately the middle of the vehicle and goes back 5 m (16 ft). Drivers are also warned of vehicles rapidly approaching from up to 70 m (230 ft) behind the vehicle.

How the System Works
The LCA symbol lights up in the outside mirrors when the system detects a moving vehicle in the next lane over that is in the side blind zone or rapidly approaching that zone from behind. A lit LCA symbol indicates it may be unsafe to change lanes. Before making a lane change, check the LCA display, check mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the turn signals.

Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual43

Left Outside Mirror Display

Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual62

Right Outside Mirror Display

When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror LCA displays will briefly come on to indicate the system is operating. When the vehicle is in a forward gear, the left or right outside mirror display will light up if a moving vehicle is detected in the next lane over in that blind zone or rapidly approaching that zone. If the turn signal is activated in the same direction as a detected vehicle, this display will flash as an extra warning not to change lanes.

LCA can be disabled. When you disable LCA, Side Blind Zone Alert is also disabled. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems. If LCA is disabled by the driver, the LCA mirror displays will not light up.

When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly
The LCA system requires some driving for the system to calibrate to maximum performance. This calibration may occur more quickly if the vehicle is driving on a straight highway road with traffic and roadside objects (e.g., guardrails, barriers).

LCA displays may not come on when passing a vehicle quickly, for a stopped vehicle, or when towing a trailer. The LCA detection zones that extend back from the side of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed. Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer. LCA may alert to objects attached to the vehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle, or object extending out to either side of the vehicle. Attached objects may also interfere with the detection of vehicles. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service.
LCA may not always alert the driver to vehicles in the next lane over, especially in wet conditions or when driving on sharp curves. The system does not need to be serviced. The system may light up due to guardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, and other non-moving objects. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service.
LCA may not operate when the LCA sensors in the left or right corners of the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For cleaning instructions, see “Washing the Vehicle” under Exterior Care page 314. If the DIC still displays the system unavailable message after cleaning both sides of the vehicle toward the rear corners of the vehicle, see your dealer.
If the LCA displays do not light up when moving vehicles are in the side blind zone or are rapidly approaching this zone and the system is clean, the system may need service. Take the vehicle to your dealer.

Radio Frequency Information

See Radio Frequency Statement page 344.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)
If equipped, LKA may help avoid crashes due to unintentional lane departures. This system uses a camera to detect lane markings. The LKA can be ready to assist at speeds between 60 km/h (37 mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph). On some vehicles, the system will instead operate above 50 km/h (31 mph). LKA may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane marking. It may also provide a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert if the vehicle crosses a detected lane marking. This system is not intended to keep the vehicle centered in the lane. LKA will not assist and alert if the turn signal is active in the direction of lane departure, or if it detects that you are accelerating, braking or actively steering. LKA can be overridden by turning the steering wheel. If the system detects you are steering intentionally across a lane marker, the LDW may not be given. Do not expect the LDW to occur when you are intentionally crossing a lane marker.

Warning
The LKA system does not continuously steer the vehicle. It may not keep the vehicle in the lane or give a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert, even if a lane marking is detected.
The LKA and LDW systems may not:

  • Provide an alert or enough steering assist to avoid a lane departure or crash.
  • Detect lane markings under poor weather or visibility conditions. This can occur if the windshield or headlamps are blocked by dirt, snow, or ice; if they are not in proper condition; or if the sun shines directly into the camera.
  • Detect road edges.
    Detect lanes on winding or hilly roads.
  • If LKA only detects lane markings on one side of the road, it will only assist or provide an LDW alert when approaching the lane on the side where it has detected a lane marking. Even with LKA and LDW, you must steer the vehicle. Always keep your attention on the road and maintain proper vehicle position within the lane, or vehicle damage, injury, or death could occur. Always keep the windshield, headlamps, and camera sensors clean and in good repair. Do not use LKA in bad weather conditions or on roads with unclear lane markings, such as construction zones.

Warning
Using LKA on slippery roads could cause loss of control of the vehicle and a crash. Turn the system off.

LKA will not alert the driver if a towed trailer crosses into an adjacent lane of travel. Serious injury or property damage may occur if the trailer moves into another lane. Always monitor the trailer position while towing to make sure it is within the same lane as the tow vehicle.

  • How the System Works
    LKA uses a camera sensor installed on the windshield ahead of the rearview mirror to detect lane markings. It may provide brief steering assist if it detects an unintended lane departure. It may further provide an audible alert or the driver seat may pulse indicating that a lane marking has been crossed. The system does not provide a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) when intentionally steering across a lane marker. To turn LKA on and off, press Buick Enclave 2023 Instruments and Controls User Manual 60on the center stack. If equipped, the indicator light on the button comes on when LKA is on and turns off when LKA is disabled. In some vehicles a long press of over three seconds is required to turn LKA off.
  • When on, Buick Enclave 2023 Instruments and Controls User Manual 60 is white, if equipped, indicating that the system is not ready to assist. A is green if LKA is ready to assist. LKA may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane marking. Buick Enclave 2023 Instruments and Controls User Manual 60 is amber when assisting. It may also provide a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert by flashing Buick Enclave 2023 Instruments and Controls User Manual 60amber if the vehicle crosses a detected lane marking. Additionally, there may be three beeps, or the driver seat may pulse three times, on the right or left, depending on the lane departure direction.

Take Steering
The LKA system does not continuously steer the vehicle. If LKA does not detect active driver steering, an alert and chime may be provided. Steer the vehicle to dismiss. LKA may become temporarily unavailable after repeated take steering alerts.

When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly
The system performance may be affected by:

  • Close vehicles ahead .
    Sudden lighting changes, such as when driving through tunnels.
  • Banked road .
  • Roads with poor lane markings, such as two-lane roads.

If the LKA system is not functioning properly when lane markings are clearly visible, cleaning the windshield may help.

A camera blocked message may display if the camera is blocked. Some driver assistance systems may have reduced performance or not work at all. An LKA or LDW unavailable message may display if the systems are temporarily unavailable. This message could be due to a blocked camera. The LKA system does not need service. Clean the outside of the windshield behind the rearview mirror.

LKA assistance and/or LDW alerts may occur due to tar marks, shadows, cracks in the road, temporary or construction lane markings, or other road imperfections. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service. Turn LKA off if these conditions continue.

Fuel

Top Tier Fuel

GM recommends the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline to keep the engine clean, reduce engine deposits, and maintain optimal vehicle performance. Look for the TOP TIER Logo or see www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline marketers and applicable countries.

Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 44

Recommended Fuel

Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual45

Regular unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM specification D4814 with a posted octane rating (R+M)/2 of 87 or greater is recommended. Do not use gasoline with a posted octane rating of less than 87, as this will result in reduced performance and driveability. If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at 87 or greater, the engine needs service.

Do not use any fuel labeled E85 or FlexFuel. Do not use gasoline with ethanol levels greater than 15% by volume.

Prohibited Fuels
Caution
Do not use fuels with any of the following conditions; doing so may damage the vehicle and void its warranty:

  • For vehicles that are not FlexFuel, fuel labeled greater than 15% ethanol by volume, such as mid-level ethanol blends (16–50% ethanol), E85, or FlexFuel.
  • Fuel with any amount of methanol, methylal, ferrocene, and aniline. These fuels can corrode metal fuel system parts or damage plastic and rubber
  • Fuel containing metals such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT), which can damage the emissions control system and spark plugs.
  • Fuel with a posted octane rating of less than the recommended fuel. Using this fuel will lower fuel economy and performance, and may decrease the life of the emissions catalyst.

Fuels in Foreign Countries

The U.S., Canada, and Mexico post fuel octane ratings in anti-knock index (AKI). For fuel not to use in a foreign country, see Prohibited Fuels page 237 .

Fuel Additives
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is highly recommended for use with your vehicle. If your country does not have TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, add ACDelco Fuel System Treatment Plus−Gasoline to the vehicle’s gasoline fuel tank at every oil change or 15 000 km (9,000 mi), whichever occurs first. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline and ACDelco Fuel System Treatment Plus Gasoline will help keep your vehicle’s engine fuel deposit free and performing optimally.

Filling the Tank
An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel door is on. See Fuel Gauge page 96

Warning
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn violently and can cause injury or death.
Follow these guidelines to help avoid injuries to you and others:

  • Read and follow all the instructions on the fuel pump island.
  • Turn off the engine when refueling.
    Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
    Do not leave the fuel pump unattended.
    Avoid using electronic devices while refueling.
    Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping fuel.
    Keep children away from the fuel pump and never let children pump fuel.
  • Before touching the fill nozzle, touch a metallic object to discharge static electricity from your body.
  • Fuel can spray out if the fill nozzle is inserted too quickly. This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Insert the fill nozzle slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop before beginning to flow fuel.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual 46

To open the fuel door, push and release the rearward center edge of the door.
The capless refueling system does not have a fuel cap. Fully insert and latch the fill nozzle, begin fueling.

Warning
Overfilling the fuel tank by more than three clicks of a standard fill nozzle may cause:

  1. Vehicle performance issues, including engine stalling and damage to the fuel system.
  2. Fuel spills.
  3. Under certain conditions, fuel fires.
  4. Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait five seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the fill nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Exterior Care page 314. Push the fuel door closed until it latches.

Filling the Tank with a Portable Fuel Container
If the vehicle runs out of fuel and must be filled from a portable fuel container .

Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual47

  1. Locate the capless funnel adapter from the rear cargo area under the load floor tray.
  2. Insert and latch the funnel into the capless fuel system.

Warning
Attempting to refuel from a portable fuel container without using the funnel adapter may cause fuel spillage and damage the capless fuel system. This could cause a fire. You or others could be badly burned and the vehicle could be damaged.

  1. Remove and clean the funnel adapter and return it to the storage location

Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Warning
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You or others could be badly burned and the vehicle could be damaged. To help avoid injury to you and others:

  • Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
  • Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, in a pickup bed, or on any surface other than the ground.
  • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Maintain contact until filling is complete.
  • Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
    Avoid using electronic devices while pumping fuel.

Trailer Towing

General Towing Information
Only use towing equipment that has been designed for the vehicle. Contact your dealer or trailering dealer for assistance with preparing the vehicle to tow a trailer. Read the entire section before towing a trailer.

To tow a disabled vehicle, see Transporting a Disabled Vehicle page 311. To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle such as a motor home, see Recreational Vehicle Towing page 312.

Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips
Warning
You can lose control when towing a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too heavy or the trailer brakes are inadequate for the load, the vehicle may not stop as expected. You and others could be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be damaged, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle.

Driving with a Trailer
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.

The following information has many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. Read this section carefully before pulling a trailer.

When towing a trailer:

  • Become familiar with and follow all state and local laws that apply to trailer These requirements vary from state to state.
  • State laws may require the use of extended side view mirrors. If your visibility is limited or restricted while towing, install extended side view mirrors, even if not required.
  • Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 mi) of vehicle use to prevent damage to the engine, axle, or other parts.
  • GM recommends performing an oil change to the vehicle before heavy.
  • Do not drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and do not make starts at full throttle during the first 800 km (500 mi) of trailer
  • Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). If the transmission downshifts too often, a lower gear may be selected using Manual Mode. See Manual Mode page 203 .

If equipped, the following driver assistance features should be turned off when towing a trailer:

  • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
  • Super Cruise Control
  • Park Assist
  • Automatic Parking Assist (APA)
  • Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

If equipped, the following driver assistance features should be turned to alert or off when towing a trailer:

  • Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
  • Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)
  • Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)

If equipped with Lane Change Alert (LCA), the LCA detection zones that extend back from the side of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed. Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer.

If equipped with Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA), use caution while backing up when towing a trailer, as the RCTA detection zones that extend out from the back of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed.

Warning
To prevent serious injury or death from carbon monoxide (CO), when towing a trailer:

Do not drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window open.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.
Adjust the climate control system to a setting that brings in only outside air. See “Climate Control Systems” in the Index.

For more information about carbon monoxide, see Engine Exhaust page 201 .

Towing a trailer requires experience. The combination of the vehicle and trailer is longer and not as responsive as the vehicle itself. Get used to the handling and braking of the combination by driving on a level road surface before driving on public roads.

The trailer structure, the tires, and the brakes must be all be rated to carry the intended cargo. Inadequate trailer equipment can cause the combination to operate in an unexpected or unsafe manner. Before driving, inspect all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps, tires, and mirrors. See Towing Equipment page 246   If the trailer has electric brakes, start the combination moving and then manually apply the trailer brake controller to check the trailer brakes work. During the trip, occasionally check that the cargo and trailer are secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are working.

Towing with a Stability Control System
When towing, the stability control system might be heard. The system reacts to vehicle movement caused by the trailer, which mainly occurs during cornering. This is normal when towing heavier trailers.

Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving without a trailer. This can help to avoid heavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer. The combination of the vehicle and trailer will not accelerate as quickly and is much longer than the vehicle alone. It is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane. Pass on level roadways. Avoid passing on hills if possible.

Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. To move the trailer to the left, move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move that hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.

Making Turns
Caution
Turn more slowly and make wider arcs when towing a trailer to prevent damage to your vehicle. Making very sharp turns could cause the trailer to contact the vehicle.

Make wider turns than normal when towing, so the trailer will not go over soft shoulders, over curbs, or strike road signs, trees, or other objects. Always signal turns well in advance. Do not steer or brake suddenly.

Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downhill grade. If the transmission is not shifted down, the brakes may overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

When towing at higher altitudes, engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at lower altitudes. If the engine is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, the vehicle could show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run, preferably on level ground, with the transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes before turning the engine off. If the overheat warning comes on, see Engine Overheating page 264

Warning
To prevent serious injury or death, always park your vehicle and trailer on a level surface when possible.

When parking your vehicle and your trailer on a hill:

  1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
  2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
  3. When the wheel chocks are in place, gradually release the brake pedal to allow the chocks to absorb the load of the trailer.
  4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park).
  5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

  1. Apply and hold the brake pedal:
    • Start the engine.
    • Shift into the desired gear.
    • Release the parking brake.
  2. Let up on the brake pedal.
  3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
  4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when used to tow trailers. See Maintenance Schedule page 324. It is especially important to check the engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system, and brake system before and during each trip.

Check periodically that all nuts and bolts on the trailer hitch are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating page 264 .

Trailer Towing
Caution
Towing a trailer improperly can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. To tow a trailer correctly, follow the directions in this section and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle.

Trailer Weight
Warning
Never exceed the towing capacity for your vehicle.

Safe trailering requires monitoring the weight, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature, dimensions of the front of the trailer, and how frequently the vehicle is used to tow a trailer.

Trailer Weight Ratings
When towing a trailer, the combined weight of the vehicle, vehicle contents, trailer, and trailer contents must be below all of the maximum weight ratings for the vehicle including:

  • Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
  • Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
  • Maximum Trailer Weight Rating
  • Gross Axle Weight Rating-Rear (GAWR-RR)
  • Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating

See “Weight-Distributing Hitch Adjustment” under Towing Equipment page 246 to determine if equalizer bars are required to obtain the maximum trailer weight rating.

See “Trailer Brakes” under Towing Equipment page 246 to determine if brakes are required based on the trailer weight.

The only way to be sure the weight is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the tow vehicle and trailer combination, fully loaded for the trip, getting individual weights for each of these items.

Warning
You and others could be seriously injured or killed if the trailer is too heavy or the trailer brakes are inadequate for the load. The vehicle may be damaged, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Only tow a trailer if all the steps in this section have been followed. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer.

Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)

GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any fuel, passengers, cargo, equipment, and accessories. Do not exceed the GCWR for your vehicle. The GCWR for the vehicle is on the tow rating chart later in this section.

To check that the weight of the vehicle and trailer are within the GCWR for the vehicle, follow these steps:

  1. Start with the “curb weight” from the Trailering Information Label.
  2. Add the weight of the trailer loaded with cargo and ready for the trip.
  3. Add the weight of all passengers.
  4. Add the weight of all cargo in the vehicle .
  5. Add the weight of hitch hardware such as a draw bar, ball, load equalizer bars, or sway bars.
  6. Add the weight of any accessories or aftermarket equipment added.

The resulting weight cannot exceed the GCWR value shown on the Trailering Information Label.

The gross combined weight can also be confirmed by weighing the truck and trailer on a public scale. The truck and trailer should be loaded for the trip with passengers and cargo .

Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual48

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
For information about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity, see Vehicle Load Limits page 190 . When calculating the GVWR with a trailer attached, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the weight the vehicle is carrying.

Maximum Trailer Weight Rating
The maximum trailer weight rating is calculated assuming the tow vehicle has a driver, a front seat passenger, and all required trailering equipment. This value represents the heaviest trailer the vehicle can tow, but it may be necessary to reduce the trailer weight to stay within the GCW, GVWR, maximum trailer tongue load, or GAWR-RR for the vehicle.

Use the tow rating chart to determine how much the trailer can weigh, based on the vehicle model, powertrain and trailering option .

Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR
1.2L CVT Front-Wheel Drive 454 kg (1,000 lb) 2,050 kg (4,519 lb)
1.3L CVT Front-Wheel Drive 454 kg (1,000 lb) 2,070 kg (4,563 lb)
1.3L AT All-Wheel Drive 454 kg (1,000 lb) 2,130 kg (4,695 lb)
* The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehice and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded.

Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating
The Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating   is the allowable trailer tongue weight that the vehicle can support using a conventional trailer hitch. It may be necessary to reduce the overall trailer weight to stay within the maximum trailer tongue weight rating while  still maintaining the correct trailer load balance.

Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual49

Do not exceed a maximum trailer tongue weight of 45.36 kg (100 lb).

The trailer tongue weight contributes to the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW). GVW includes the CURB WEIGHT of your vehicle, any passengers, cargo, equipment and the trailer tongue weight. Vehicle options, passengers, cargo, and equipment reduce the maximum allowable tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which also reduces the maximum allowable trailer weight.

Trailer Load Balance
The correct trailer load balance must be maintained to ensure trailer stability. Incorrect load balance is a leading cause of trailer sway.

Buick Enclave 2023 Driving and Operating User Manual50

The trailer tongue weight (1) should be 10– 15% of the loaded trailer weight (2). Some specific trailer types, such as boat trailers, fall outside of this range. Always refer to the trailer owner’s manual for the recommended trailer tongue weight for each trailer. Never exceed the maximum loads for your vehicle, hitch and trailer.

After loading the trailer, separately weigh the trailer and then the trailer tongue and calculate the trailer load balance percentage to see if the weights and distribution are appropriate for your vehicle. If the trailer weight is too high, it may be possible to transfer some of the cargo into your vehicle .

If the trailer tongue weight is too high or too low, it may be possible to rearrange some of the cargo inside of the trailer.

Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle. Use the shortest hitch extension available to position the hitch ball closer to your vehicle. This will help reduce the effect of the trailer tongue weight on the trailer hitch and the rear axle.

If a cargo carrier is used in the trailer hitch receiver, choose a carrier that positions the load as close to the vehicle as possible.
Make sure the total weight, including the carrier, is no more than half of the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle.

Ask your dealer for trailering information or assistance.

Towing Equipment
Hitches
Always use the correct hitch equipment for your vehicle. Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads can affect the trailer and the hitch.

Proper hitch equipment for your vehicle helps maintain control of the vehicle-trailer combination. Many trailers can be towed using a weight-carrying hitch which has a coupler latched to the hitch ball, or a tow eye latched to a pintle hook. Other trailers may require a weight-distributing hitch that uses spring bars to distribute the trailer tongue weight between your vehicle and trailer axles. See “Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight” under Trailer Towing page 243 for weight limits with various hitch types.
Never attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches. Only use frame-mounted hitches that do not attach to the bumper.

Tires
Do not tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire on the vehicle .

  • Tires must be properly inflated to support loads while towing a trailer. See Tires page 287  for instructions on proper tire inflation.

Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer, and attach the chains to the holes on the trailer hitch platform.

Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so the combination can turn. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes
Loaded trailers over 450 kg (1,000 lb) must be equipped with brake systems and with brakes for each axle. Trailer braking equipment conforming to Canadian Standards Association (CSA) requirement CAN3-D313, or its equivalent, is recommended.

State or local regulations may require trailers to have their own braking system if the loaded weight of the trailer exceeds certain minimums that can vary from state to state.
Read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed, adjusted, and maintained properly.
Never attempt to tamper with the hydraulic brake system for your trailer brakes. Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do, both the vehicle antilock brakes and the trailer brakes may not function, which could result in a crash.

Trailer Lamps
The trailer wiring harness (if equipped), with a seven-pin connector is located at the rear of the vehicle, and it is tied to the vehicle’s frame.

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When properly connected, the trailer turn signals will illuminate to indicate the vehicle is turning, changing lanes, or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument cluster will illuminate even if the trailer is not properly connected or the bulbs are burned out.

Trailer Tires
Special Trailer (ST) tires differ from vehicle tires. Trailer tires are designed with stiff sidewalls to help prevent sway and to support heavy loads. These features can make it difficult to determine if the trailer tire pressures are low only based on a visual inspection.

Always check all trailer tire pressures before each trip when the tires are cool. Low trailer tire pressure is a leading cause of trailer tire blow-outs.

Trailer tires deteriorate over time. The trailer tire sidewall will show the week and year the tire was manufactured. Many trailer tire manufacturers recommend replacing tires more than six years old.
Overloading is another leading cause of trailer tire blow-outs. Never load your trailer with more weight than the tires are designed to support. The load rating is located on the trailer tire sidewall.
Always know the maximum speed rating for the trailer tires before driving. This may be significantly lower than the vehicle tire speed rating. The speed rating may be on the trailer tire sidewall. If the speed rating is not shown, the default trailer tire speed rating is 105 km/h (65 mph).

Conversions and Add-Ons

Add-On Electrical Equipment
Warning
The Data Link Connector (DLC) is used for vehicle service and Emission Inspection/Maintenance testing. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light) page 106

A device connected to the DLC — such as an aftermarket fleet or driver-behavior tracking device — may interfere with vehicle systems. This could affect vehicle operation and cause a crash. Such devices may also access information stored in the vehicle’s systems.

Caution
Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle or cause components to not work and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle’s 12-volt battery, even if the vehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle page 60
Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle page 61.

FAQs

  1. What type of engine does the Buick Encore GX 2023 have?
    Typically, the Buick Encore GX 2023 has a gasoline turbocharged engine. Depending on the configuration and trim level, there may be different engine options.
  2. Is the Encore GX available in front-wheel drive or all-wheel drive?
    Both front-wheel drive (FWD) and all-wheel drive (AWD) versions of the Encore GX are offered. Your preferences and driving requirements will influence your decision between FWD and AWD.
  3. What is the fuel efficiency of the Encore GX?
    Depending on the engine, transmission, and drivetrain setup, the Encore GX’s fuel efficiency varies. With an average range of about 25 to 30 miles per gallon (MPG) for combined city and highway driving, it does, however, generally offer good fuel efficiency for a compact SUV.
  4. Does the Encore GX have a fuel-saving start-stop feature?
    The Encore GX does indeed frequently come with a fuel-saving start-stop feature. The engine is automatically restarted when the car comes to a complete stop thanks to this feature, which also helps save fuel when the car is idling.
  5. Can I tow with the Encore GX?
    Yes, the Encore GX typically has a 1,000-pound towing capacity. For safe towing, it’s crucial to review the vehicle’s specifications and adhere to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
  6. Does the Encore GX have different driving modes?
    The specific trim level and options may affect which driving modes are offered. Selectable driving modes, like Normal, Sport, and Eco, are available on some Encore GX models. These modes modify the vehicle’s performance characteristics to accommodate various driving preferences and circumstances.
  7. Are there available safety features in the Encore GX?
    Yes, the Encore GX frequently comes with optional safety features to improve your driving. Depending on the trim level and options selected, these features may include forward collision warning, lane departure warning, blind-spot monitoring, rear cross-traffic alert, and more.
  8. Does the Encore GX have a rearview camera?
    Yes, a rearview camera is typically a standard feature of the Encore GX. This camera offers a view of the space behind the car to help with parking and navigating through narrow spaces.
  9. Is there a parking assist feature in the Encore GX?
    The Encore GX may have features for parking assistance. These features make it simpler to navigate into parking spaces by using sensors to help detect and warn you of nearby obstacles while parking.
  10. Does the Encore GX have adaptive cruise control?
    The Encore GX may have features for parking assistance. These features make it simpler to navigate into parking spaces by using sensors to help detect and warn you of nearby obstacles while parking.
  11. Can I connect my smartphone to the Encore GX for hands-free calling and music streaming?
    Yes, the Encore GX usually comes with Bluetooth connectivity, enabling you to wirelessly connect your smartphone. This makes it possible to make hands-free phone calls and stream music through the car’s audio system.
  12. Are there available advanced driver-assistance systems (ADAS) in the Encore GX?
    Yes, the Encore GX might have available high-tech driver aids. To increase safety and assistance while driving, these systems make use of cutting-edge technologies like automatic emergency braking, lane-keeping assist, and adaptive headlights.
  13. Does the Encore GX have a push-button start?
    The Encore GX does frequently come with a push-button start feature. When the key fob is inside the car, you can start the vehicle without a traditional key by pressing a button.

2023 Buick Encore Gx Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Useful Links

View Full Manual: Buick Encore GX 2023 User Manual | Auto User Guide
Download Manual: Manuals and Guides | Vehicle Support | Buick

Related Article

2024 Buick Envista Specs, Price, Features, Mileage and Review

2023 Buick Enclave Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2023 Buick Envision Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2024 Buick Encore GX Specs, Price, Features, Mileage and Review

Categories
Buick Encore GX

2023 Buick Encore GX Climate Controls Guidelines

Buick Logo

Buick Encore GX 2023 Climate Controls User Manual

The advanced temperature control system in the 2023 Buick Encore GX is both comfortable and convenient. This high-tech system has been carefully made to meet the needs of both drivers and passengers. It has a wide range of features and settings to create the best possible environment inside the car. The climate control system in the Buick Encore GX gives you a wide range of choices to keep you and your passengers comfortable, no matter if you’re going on a road trip in the middle of a hot summer or driving through the middle of a cold winter. With its easy-to-use touch-screen interface and high-tech sensors, the 2023 Encore GX changes what it means to be relaxed and in charge on the road. Let’s look into the finer points of this high-tech climate control system to find out the amazing things it can do.

2023 Buick Encore Gx Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Climate Control Systems

Buick Encore GX 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 01

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with this system.

  1. Temperature Control
  2.  Air Delivery Mode Controls
  3.  MAX Defrost
  4. Rear Window Defogger
  5. Fan Control
  6. Driver and Passenger Heated Seats (If Equipped)
  7. Recirculation
  8. A/C (Air Conditioning)

Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 06Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed or turn the fan off.
Temperature Control: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature.

Air Delivery Mode Controls: Press Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 03 Y, or Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 01 to change the direction of the airflow.
The indicator light in the button will turn on. Any combination of the three buttons can be selected. The indicator light in the button will turn on.

To change the current mode, select one or more of the following:

Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 03 Clears the windows of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield

Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 01Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.

Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 02Clears the windows of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield.

Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 04MAX : Air is directed to the windshield, the fan runs at a higher speed, and the temperature of the air is increased if not already at maximum. This mode overrides the previous mode selected and clears fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.

WhenBuick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 04 MAX is pressed again, the system returns to the previous mode setting and fan speed.

For best results, clear all snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.

A/C : Touch A/C on the display to turn the air conditioning on or off. If the fan is turned off, the air conditioner will not run and A/C OFF will show on the climate control display.

Touch AUTO to return to automatic operation and the air conditioner runs automatically as needed.

Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 05Press to turn on recirculation. An indicator light comes on. Air is recirculated to quickly cool the inside of the vehicle or to reduce the entry of outside air and odors.

Rear Window Defogger

Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator light on the button comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on.
The defogger can be turned off by turning the vehicle off or to accessory mode.
If the vehicle is equipped with heated outside mirrors, they turn on when the rear window defogger button is on and help to clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror.

  • Caution
    Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the front windshield and rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp. This may damage the rear window defogger grid and affect the radio’s ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 08 or Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 09 If equipped, press M or L to heat the driver or passenger seat.

If equipped, press C or { to ventilate the driver or passenger seat. 

After blow Feature
If equipped, under certain conditions, the fan may stay on or may turn on and off several times after you turn off and lock the vehicle. This is normal.

2023 Buick Encore Gx Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemBuick Encore GX 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 02

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with this system.

  1. Driver and Passenger Temperature Controls
  2. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
  3. Fan Controls
  4. MAX Defrost
  5. Rear Window Defogger
  6. Sync (Synchronized Temperatures)
  7. Recirculation
  8. Driver and Passenger Heated Seats (If Equipped)
  9. Air Delivery Mode Control
  10. ON/OFF (Power)
  11. A/C (Air Conditioning)

Automatic Operation
The system automatically controls the fan speed, air delivery, air conditioning, and recirculation in order to heat or cool the vehicle to the desired temperature.
When AUTO is lit, all four functions operate automatically. Each function can also be manually set and the selected setting is displayed.
Functions not manually set will continue to be automatically controlled, even if the AUTO indicator is not lit.

For automatic operation:

  1. Press AUTO
  2. Set the temperature, allow the system time to stabilize, and adjust the temperature as needed.

Driver and Passenger Temperature Control: The temperature can be adjusted separately for the driver and the passenger. Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature.

SYNC: Press to link all climate zone settings to the driver setting. The SYNC indicator light will turn on. When the passenger settings are adjusted, the SYNC indicator light turns off.

Manual Operation
In addition to the controls on the center stack; the fan, air delivery mode, temperature, and other climate settings can be controlled by touching CLIMATE on the infotainment Home Page or the climate button in the application tray.

ON/OFF : Press to turn the fan off or on. When off, no air will flow into the vehicle. Turning the fan on, pressing any other button, or turning a knob will turn the system back on using the current setting.
Press to increase or decrease the fan speed. The fan speed setting appears on the main display. Pressing either button cancels automatic fan control and the fan is controlled manually. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.

Air Delivery Mode Controls: Press any combination ofBuick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 03, or Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 01to change the direction of the airflow. The indicator light in the button will turn on. The current mode appears in the display screen.

Pressing any of the three buttons cancels automatic air delivery control and the direction of the airflow is controlled manually. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.

To change the current mode, select one or more of the following:

Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 02Clears the windows of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield.

Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 01Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.

Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 03Air is directed to the floor outlets.
Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 04MAX: Air is directed to the windshield and the fan runs at a higher speed. Fog or frost is cleared from the windshield more quickly. When the button is pressed again, the system returns to the previous mode setting.
For best results, clear all snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.
A/C : Press to turn the air conditioning system on or off. If the climate control system is turned off or the outside temperature falls below freezing, the air conditioner will not run.
Pressing this button cancels automatic air conditioning and turns off the air conditioner. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation and the air conditioner runs automatically as needed. When the indicator light is on, the air conditioner runs automatically to cool the air inside the vehicle or to dry the air needed to defog the windshield faster.

Press to turn on recirculation. An indicator light comes on. Air is recirculated to quickly cool the inside of the vehicle or to reduce the entry of outside air and odors.

Auto Defog
The climate control system may have a sensor to automatically detect high humidity inside the vehicle. When high humidity is detected, the climate control system may adjust to outside air supply and turn on the air conditioner. The fan speed may slightly increase to help prevent fogging. If the climate control system does not detect possible window fogging, it returns to normal operation.

To turn Auto Defog off or on, select Settings > Climate and Air Quality > Auto Defog > Select ON or OFF.

Ionizer
If equipped with an ionizer, this feature helps to clean the air inside the vehicle and remove contaminants such as pollen, odors, and dust. If the climate control system is on and the ionizer is enabled, Ionizer On will be displayed. To turn ionizer off or on, select Settings > Climate and Air Quality > Ionizer > Select ON or OFF.

Rear Window Defogger
Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator light on the button comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on. The defogger only works when the ignition is on.

The defogger can be turned off by turning the vehicle off or accessory mode.

To turn Auto Defog off or on, select Settings > Climate and Air Quality > Auto Rear Defog > Select ON or OFF.

When auto rear defog is selected, the rear window defogger turns on automatically when the interior temperature is cold and the outside temperature is about 5 °C (41 °F) and below. The Auto Rear Defogger turns off automatically.

If the vehicle is equipped with heated outside mirrors, they turn on when the rear window defogger button is on and help to clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror. 

Caution
Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the front windshield and rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp. This may damage the rear window defogger grid and affect the radio’s ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 08 or Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 09If equipped, press Buick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 08orBuick Enclave 2023 Climate Controls User Manual 09to heat the driver or passenger seat. 
Remote Start Climate Control Operation

(If Equipped) : If the vehicle is equipped with the remote start feature, the climate control system may run when the vehicle is started remotely. The system uses the driver’s previous settings to heat or cool the inside of the vehicle. The rear defog may come on during remote start based on cold ambient conditions. If the vehicle has heated seats, they may come on during a remote start.

Sensors

The solar sensor on top of the instrument panel near the windshield monitors the solar heat. The climate control system uses the sensor information to adjust the temperature, fan speed, recirculation, and air delivery mode for best comfort.

Do not cover the sensor; otherwise the automatic climate control system may not work properly.

After blow Feature
If equipped, under certain conditions, the fan may stay on or may turn on and off several times after you turn off and lock the vehicle. This is normal.

Air Vents

Use the louvers located on the air vents to change the direction of the airflow.

To open or close off the airflow:

Move slider knobs away from the occupant for shut off closing.

Operation Tips

  • Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from air inlets at the base of the windshield that could block the flow of air into the vehicle.
  • Clear snow off the hood to improve visibility and help decrease moisture drawn into the vehicle, which may improve long term system performance.
  • Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more effectively.
  • Use of non-GM-approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
  • Use of non-GM-approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
  • Do not attach any devices to the air vent slats. This restricts airflow and may cause damage to the air vents.

Caution
Use of air fresheners may cause permanent damage to plastics and painted surfaces. If an air freshener comes in contact with any plastic or painted surface in the vehicle, blot immediately and clean with a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution. Damage caused by air fresheners would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Maintenance

Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The filter reduces dust, pollen, and other airborne irritants from outside air that is pulled into the vehicle. The filter should be replaced as part of routine scheduled maintenance. 

See your dealer regarding the replacement of the filter.

Service

All vehicles have a label underhood that identifies the refrigerant used in the vehicle. The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. The air conditioning evaporator should never be repaired or replaced by one from a salvage vehicle. It should only be replaced by a new evaporator to ensure proper and safe operation.

During service, all refrigerants should be reclaimed with proper equipment. Venting refrigerants directly to the atmosphere is harmful to the environment and may also create unsafe conditions based on inhalation, combustion, frostbite, or other health-based concerns.

The air conditioning system requires periodic maintenance. 

FAQ

Q: What type of climate control system does the Buick Encore GX 2023 feature?

A: The Buick Encore GX 2023 is equipped with an advanced climate control system.

Q: How do I turn on the air conditioning in the Buick Encore GX 2023?

A: To activate the air conditioning, locate the A/C button on the climate control panel and press it. Adjust the temperature and fan speed as desired.

Q: Can I set different temperatures for the driver and passenger sides?

A: Yes, many modern vehicles, including the Buick Encore GX 2023, offer dual-zone climate control, allowing you to set different temperatures for the driver and passenger sides.

Q: What is the purpose of the “Auto” mode on the climate control system?

A: The “Auto” mode allows the system to automatically adjust the temperature, fan speed, and air distribution to maintain the desired cabin temperature.

Q: How can I defrost the windshield and windows quickly?

A: You can use the defrost mode, typically indicated by a symbol of a windshield with wavy lines, to quickly clear frost or condensation from the windows.

Q: Are there heated seats in the Buick Encore GX 2023?

A: Many vehicles, including the Buick Encore GX, offer heated seats for added comfort during colder weather.

Q: Can I control the rear climate settings separately?

A: Some vehicles offer rear climate controls that allow passengers in the back to adjust their temperature and airflow independently. Check the specific model’s features for details.

Q: How do I turn off the air recirculation mode?

A: You can usually turn off the recirculation mode by pressing the corresponding button on the climate control panel.

Q: Is there a way to sync the temperature settings between the driver and passenger sides?

A: Some vehicles have a “sync” button that can be pressed to align the temperature settings for both sides.

Q: What should I do if the climate control system isn’t working properly?

A: If you encounter issues with the climate control system, it’s advisable to consult the vehicle’s owner’s manual for troubleshooting steps or seek assistance from a qualified technician.

Q: Are there air vents in the rear for passengers?

A: Most vehicles come equipped with rear air vents to ensure comfortable conditions for rear-seat passengers.

Q: Can I set a timer for the climate control system to start or stop at a specific time?

A: Some vehicles offer a feature that allows you to schedule the climate control system to start or stop at a predetermined time. Check the owner’s manual for details.

Q: How do I adjust the fan speed in the Buick Encore GX 2023?

A: You can typically adjust the fan speed using the fan control knob or buttons on the climate control panel.

How to turn on heat in Buick encore?
To turn on the heat in a Buick Encore, start by turning the ignition key to the “On” position without starting the engine. Then, adjust the climate control settings by selecting the desired temperature and fan speed on the HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning) controls.

Useful Link

View Full Manual: Buick Encore GX 2023 User Manual | Auto User Guide

Buick Encore GX 2023 Technical Data User Manual

2023 Buick Encore Gx Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Categories
Buick Encore GX

Buick Encore GX 2023 Infotainment System User Manual

Buick Logo

Buick Encore GX 2023 Infotainment System User Manual

Introduction

Introduction

Read the following pages to become familiar with the features.

Warning
Taking your eyes off the road for too long or too often while using any infotainment feature can cause a crash. You or others could be injured or killed. Do not give extended attention to infotainment tasks while driving. Limit your glances at the vehicle displays and focus your attention on driving. Use voice commands whenever possible.

The infotainment system has built-in features intended to help avoid distraction by disabling some features when driving. These features may gray out when they are unavailable. Many infotainment features are also available through the instrument cluster and steering wheel controls.

Before driving:

  • Become familiar with the operation, center stack controls, steering wheel controls, and infotainment display.
  • Set up the audio by presetting favorite stations, setting the tone, and adjusting the speakers.
  • Set up phone numbers in advance so they can be called easily by pressing a single control or by using a single voice command.

See Distracted Driving page 184.

Active Noise Cancellation (ANC)
If equipped, ANC reduces engine noise in the vehicle’s interior. ANC requires the factory-installed audio system, radio, speakers, amplifier (if equipped), induction system, and exhaust system to work properly. Deactivation is required by your dealer if related aftermarket equipment is installed.

Overview

Infotainment System
The infotainment system is controlled by using the infotainment display, the controls on the center stack, steering wheel controls, and voice recognition.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Infotainment System User Manual1

  1. Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 003(Home Page)
    • Press to go to the Home Page.
  2. Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 004
      •  Radio: Press and release to go to the previous station or channel. Press and hold to fast seek the next strongest previous station or channel.
      • USB/Bluetooth: Press to seek to the beginning of the current or previous track. Press and hold to quickly reverse through a track. Release to return to playing speed.
  3. Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 028 (Power)
    • When off, press Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 028 to turn the system on. Press and hold to turn off.
    • When on, press Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 028 to mute the system and display a status pane.
    • Press Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 028 again to unmute the system.
    • Turn to decrease or increase the volume..
  4. Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 001
    • Radio: Press and release to go to the next station or channel. Press and hold to fast seek the next track or strongest station or channel.
    • USB/Bluetooth: Press to seek the next track. Press and hold to fast forward through a track. Release to return to playing speed.
  5. BACK
    • Press to return to the previous screen in a menu.

Steering Wheel Controls

Buick Encore GX 2023 Infotainment System User Manual2

Type 1

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 005 For vehicles with Bluetooth or OnStar, press to interact with those systems.
Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 006Press to silence the vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on. For vehicles with Bluetooth or OnStar systems, press to reject an incoming call, or to end a  current call.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Infotainment System User Manual3

The favorite and volume switches are on the back of the steering wheel.

  1. Favorite: When on a radio source, press to select the next or previous favorite. When on a media source, press to select the next or previous track.
  2. Volume: Press to increase or decrease the volume.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Infotainment System User Manual4Type 2

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 005For vehicles with Bluetooth or OnStar, press to interact with those systems.
Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 006Press to silence the vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on. For vehicles with Bluetooth or OnStar systems, press to reject an incoming call, or to end a current call.
Buick Enclave 2023infortainment system User Manual 004+ : Press + to increase the volume.
Buick Enclave 2023infortainment system User Manual 004− : Press − to decrease the volume.
FAV or FAV + : When on a radio source, press to select the previous or next favorite.
When on a media source, press to select the previous or next track.
SRC ^ : Press to select a source or toggle to change favorite stations.

Using the System
Infotainment Display Icons
Infotainment display icons show when available. When a function is unavailable, the icon may gray out. When a function is selected, the icon may highlight.

Audio
Touch the Audio icon to display the active audio source page. Examples of available sources may include AM, FM, SXM (if equipped), USB, and Bluetooth.

Phone
Touch the Phone icon to display the Phone main page. See Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone) page  157or Bluetooth (Overview page 158)

Nav
If equipped, touch the Nav icon to display the navigation map. See Using the Navigation System page 140.

Wi-Fi
If equipped, touch the Users icon to display the Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.

Settings
Touch the Settings icon to display the Settings menu. See Setting page 162.

Apple CarPlay
Touch the Apple CarPlay icon to activate Apple CarPlay (if equipped) after a supported device is connected. See Apple CarPlay and Android Auto page 161.

Android Auto
Touch the Android Auto icon to activate Android Auto (if equipped) after a supported device is connected. See Apple CarPlay and Android Auto page 161.

OnStar Services
If equipped, touch the OnStar Services icon to display the OnStar Services and Account pages.

Climate
If equipped, touch the Climate icon to display the Climate main page.

Camera
If equipped, touch the Camera icon to access the camera application.

SiriusXM
If equipped, touch the SiriusXM icon to display the SiriusXM radio service.

Shortcut Tray
The shortcut tray is near the bottom of the display. It shows up to four applications.

Infotainment Display Features
Infotainment display features show on the display when available. When a feature is unavailable, it may gray out. When a feature is touched, it may highlight.

Infotainment Gestures
Use the following finger gestures to control the infotainment system.

Touch/Tap

Buick Encore GX 2023 Infotainment System User Manual4

Touch/tap is used to select an icon or option, activate an application, or change the location inside a map .

Touch and Hold

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 04

Touch and hold can be used to start another gesture, or to move or delete an application.

Drag

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 05

Drag is used to move applications on the Home Page, or to pan the map. To drag the item, it must be held and moved along the display to the new location. This can be  done up, down, right, or left. This feature is only available when vehicle is parked and not in motion.

Nudge

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 06

Nudge is used to move items a short distance on a list or a map. To nudge, hold and move the selected item up or down to a new location.

Fling or Swipe

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 07

Fling or swipe is used to scroll through a list, pan the map, or change page views. Do this by placing a finger on the display then moving it rapidly up and down or right and left.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces and Vehicle Information and Radio Displays
For vehicles with high gloss surfaces or vehicle displays, use a microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces. Before wiping the surface with the microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt that could scratch the surface. Then use the microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to clean. Never use window cleaners or solvents. Periodically hand wash the microfiber cloth separately, using mild soap. Do not use bleach or fabric softener.

Rinse thoroughly and air dry before next use.

Software Updates

Over-the-Air Software Updates

If equipped, see “Updates” under Settings page 162 for details on software updates.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Playing the Radio
From the Home Page, touch the Audio icon to display the active audio source page.

Choose from the three most recently used sources listed at the left side of the display or touch the More icon to display a list of available sources. Examples of available sources are AM, FM, SXM (if equipped), MyMedia (if available), USB, AUX (if equipped), and Bluetooth.

Infotainment System Sound Menu
From any of the audio source main pages, touch Sound to display the following:

Equalizer : Touch to adjust Bass, Midrange, Treble, and Surround (if equipped) using the options on the infotainment display.

Fade/Balance : Touch to adjust by using the controls on the infotainment display or by tapping/dragging the crosshair.

Finding a Station
Seeking a Station

Buick-Encore-GX-2023-Owners-Manual-Auto-User-Guide 11

From the AM, FM, or SXM (if equipped) display, touchBuick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 004 or Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 001 on the infotainment display to search for the previous or next strong station or channel.

Browsing Stations
From the AM, FM, or SXM (if equipped) display, touch Browse to list all available stations or channels. Navigate up and down through all stations by scrolling the list.

Touch the station or channel you want to listen to. TouchBuick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007 to save the station or channel as a favorite.
If equipped, touch Update Station List to update the active stations in your area.

Direct Tune

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 12

Access Direct Tune by touching the Tune icon on the infotainment display to bring up the keypad. Navigate through all frequencies using 7 or 6 on the right side of the Direct Tune display. Directly enter a station or channel using the keypad. When a new station or channel is entered, the information about that station or channel displays on the right side. This information will update with each new valid frequency. Touch H to save the station or channel as a favorite.

The keypad will gray out entries that do not contribute to a valid frequency and will automatically place a decimal point within the frequency number.

Touch (X) to delete one number at a time. Touch and hold (X) to delete all numbers.

A valid AM or FM station will automatically tune to the new frequency but not close the Direct Tune display. When listening to SXM (if equipped), touch Go after entering the channel. Touch S on the infotainment display or touch z to exit out of Direct Tune.

The tune arrows on the right side of the Direct Tune display 7 or 6 will tune through the complete station or channel list one station step at a time per touch.

A touch and hold advances through stations or channels quickly.

If equipped, HD Radio multicast stations cannot be tuned directly through the Direct Tune feature. Only the analog or

HD1 station can use that feature. Use the display arrows to adjust to the multicast stations.

AM, FM, and SXM Categories

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 13

From the AM stations, if equipped with HD Radio, FM, or SXM (if equipped) display, touch Categories at the top of the Browse menu to access the categories list. The list contains names associated with the AM or FM stations, or SXM channels. Touch a category name to display a list of stations or channels for that category. Touching a station or channel from the list will tune the radio to that station or channel.

Storing Radio Station Presets
Favorites show in the area at the top of the display.

AM, FM, SXM (if equipped), and HD Radio Stations (if equipped) : Touch and hold a preset to store the current station or channel as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite station.

Favorites can also be stored by touching H in a station or channel list. This will highlight indicating that it is now saved as a favorite.

The number of favorites displayed is automatically adjusted by default, but can be manually adjusted in Settings in the System tab under Favorites and then Set Number of Audio Favorites. It can also be adjusted in Settings in the Apps tab under Audio and then Set Number of Audio Favorites.

HD Radio Technology
If equipped, HD Radio is a free service with features such as digital quality sound, more stations available on a single frequency such as HD2 and HD3, and display information such as artist and song title.

From the Now Playing display, touch the HD Radio icon to turn HD on or off.

Station Access
To access HD Radio stations:

  1. Tune the radio to the station. If HD Radio is turned on and the station is broadcasting in HD Radio, the radio will automatically tune to the HD version of the current channel (HD1) after several
  2. seconds. The radio will also display icons representing additional channels (H…HD8), that may be available. When the radio successfully tunes to a HD station, the HD logo will display and digital audio will play.
    1. Touch the display arrows to tune to the previous or next HD Radio station.

    There may be a delay before the station starts playing.

    The HD Radio station number is indicated next to the HD logo.
    HD Radio stations can be saved as favorites.
    For a list of all stations, see www.hdradio.com.

    HD Radio Troubleshooting
    Digital Audio Delay :
    Wait for the signal to process. This can take several seconds.

    Volume Change, Audio Skip, Echo, Digital Audio Lost : Station signal strength may be weak, the station is out of range, or the station may be out of alignment. Verify proper reception on another station.

    If the HD Radio signal weakens while listening to HD1, the radio will automatically switch to the analog version of the radio station.
    If the HD Radio signal loses reception while listening to stations HD2 to HD8, the radio mutes until the signal can be recovered or until the station is changed.
    HD Radio can be disabled if driving in a weak signal area. Touch HD Radio On/Off to toggle HD Radio reception on and off.

    Radio Data System (RDS)
    RDS relies on receiving specific RDS information from radio stations and only works when the information is available.
    It is possible that a radio station could broadcast information that causes the radio to work improperly.
    In addition, RDS features are region and country of sale specific. This means specific RDS content may not be available in your listening area or in the country you operate the vehicle.
    To turn RDS features on or off, select Settings > Apps> Audio> RDS> Select ON or OFF.

    The following core and region specific RDS features may be supported by radio broadcasters in your listening area:

    Core RDS features

    • Display radio station call letters
    • Display messages from radio stations
    • Provide radio station category information (when available)

     

Region Specific RDS features

  • Support Traffic Program (TP) Alerts
  • Support Alternate Frequency (AF) Switching
  • Support Region Switching

Satellite Radio
SiriusXM Radio Service

If equipped, vehicles with a valid SiriusXM radio subscription can receive SiriusXM programming.

SiriusXM radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial-free music, coast to coast, in digital-quality sound. In the U.S., see www.siriusxm.com or call 1-888-601-6296. In Canada, see www.siriusxm.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.

When SiriusXM is active, the channel name, number, song title, and artist appear on the display.

SiriusXM with 360L
SiriusXM with 360L interface has enhanced in-vehicle listening experience for subscribers. The experience now offers more categories and system learned recommendations toward discovering more personalized content.

To use the full SiriusXM 360L program, including streaming content and listening recommendations, OnStar Connected Access is required. Connected vehicle services vary by model and require a complete working electrical system, cell reception, and GPS signal. An active connected plan is required.

Reference the SiriusXM user guide for use and subscription information.

Radio Reception
Unplug electronic devices from the accessory power outlets if there is interference or static in the radio.

FM
FM signals only reach about 16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce interference, some static can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.

AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
If equipped, SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service provides digital radio reception. Tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the SiriusXM signal for a period of time. Some cellular services may interfere with SXM reception causing loss of signal.

Mobile Device Usage
Mobile device usage, such as making or receiving calls, charging, or just having the mobile device on may cause static interference in the radio. Unplug the mobile device or turn it off if this happens.

Multi-Band Antenna
The multi-band roof antenna may be used for radio, navigation, and other communication systems, depending on the equipped options. To ensure clear reception, keep the antenna clear of obstructions, such as snow and ice. If the vehicle has a sunroof, and it is open, or a roof loaded with cargo, reception may be affected.

Audio Players

Avoiding Untrusted Media Devices
When using media devices such as USB and mobile devices, consider the source.

Untrusted media devices could contain files that affect system operation or performance and should be avoided.

USB Port
Audio stored on a USB device may be listened to.

Depending on your vehicle, it may be equipped with two USB ports in the center console under the armrest and another two on the center stack. These ports are for data and charging. There may also be two USB ports at the rear of the center console and a USB port on each side of the third row seats for charging only.

Caution
To avoid vehicle damage, unplug all accessories and disconnect all accessory cables from the vehicle when not in use. Accessory cables left plugged into the vehicle, unconnected to a device, could be damaged or cause an electrical short if the unconnected end comes in contact with liquids or another power source such as the accessory power outlet.

Playing from a USB
A USB mass storage device can be connected to the USB port.

Audio extensions supported by the USB may include:

Playing from a USB
A USB mass storage device can be connected to the USB port.

Audio extensions supported by the USB may include:

  • MP3
  • AAC
  • OGG
  • 3GP

My Media Library
MyMedia is only available when more than one indexed device is connected. It allows access to content from all indexed media sources. MyMedia will show as an available source in the Source page.

USB MP3 Player and USB Devices
The USB MP3 players and USB devices connected must comply with the USB Mass Storage Class specification (USB MSC).

To play a USB device:

  1. Connect the USB .
  2. Touch Audio from the Home page.
  3. Select USB device.

Use the following when playing an active USB source:

Touch to play the current media source.

Touch to pause playback of the current media source.

  1. Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 004
  • Touch to seek the beginning of the current or previous track.
  • Touch and hold to reverse quickly through Release to return to playing speed. Elapsed time displays.
  1. Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 001
  • Touch to seek the next
  • Touch and hold to advance quickly through Release to return to playing speed. Elapsed time displays.

Shuffle : Touch the shuffle icon to play music in random order.

USB Sound Menu
See “Infotainment System Sound Menu” under AM-FM Radio  page 133.

USB Browse Menu
When a list of songs, albums, artists, or other types of media displays, the up and down arrows and A-Z appear on the left side. Select A-Z to view a display that will show all letters of the alphabet and select the letter to go to.

Touch the up and down arrows to move the list up and down.

Touch Browse and the following may display:

Playlists:

  1. Touch to view the playlists stored on the USB.
  2. Touch a playlist to view the list of all songs in that playlist.
  3. Touch a song from the list to begin

Supported playlist extensions are m3u and pls.

Artists:

  1. Touch to view the list of artists stored on the USB.
  2. Touch an artist name to view a list of all albums by the artist.
  3. To select a song, touch All Songs or touch an album and then touch a song from the list.

Songs:

  1. Touch to display a list of all songs on the USB.
  2. To begin playback, touch a song from the list.

Albums:

  1. Touch to view the albums on the USB.
  2. Touch the album to view a list of all songs on the album.
  3. Touch a song from the list to begin playback.

Genres:

  1. Touch to view the genres on the USB.
  2. Touch a genre to view a list of artists.
  3. Touch an artist to view albums by that artist.
  4. Touch an album to view songs on the album.
  5. Touch a song to start playback.

Composers:

  1. Touch to view the composers on the USB.
  2. Touch a Composer to view a list of albums by that composer.
  3. Touch an album or All Songs to view a list of songs.
  4. Touch a song from the list to begin playback.

Folders:

  1. Touch to view the directories on the USB.
  2. Touch a folder to view a list of all files .
  3. Touch a file from the list to begin playback

Podcasts : Touch to view the podcasts on the connected Apple device and get a list of podcast episodes.

Audiobooks:

  1. Touch to view the audiobooks stored on the Apple device.
  2. Touch an audiobook to get a list of chapter.
  3. Touch the chapter from the list to begin playback

File System and Naming
File systems supported by the USB may include:

  • FAT32
  • NTFS
  • HFS+

The songs, artists, albums, and genres are taken from the file’s song information and are only displayed if present. The radio displays the file name as the track name if the song information is not available.

Storing and Recalling Media Favorites
To store media favorites, touch Browse to display a list of media types.
Touch one of the following Browse options to save a favorite:

Playlists : Touch Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007next to any playlist to store the playlist as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite playlist. The first song in the playlist begins to play.

Artists : TouchBuick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007 next to any artist to store the artist as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite artist. The first song in the artist list begins to play.

Songs : Touch Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007next to any song to store the song as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite song.

Albums : Touch Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007 next to any album to store the album as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite album. The first song in the album list begins to play.

Genres : Touch Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007next to any genre to store the genre as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite genre. The first song of the genre begins to play.

Podcasts : TouchBuick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007 next to any podcast to store the podcast as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite podcast. The podcast begins to play.

Audiobooks : Touch Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007next to any audiobook to store the audiobook as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite audiobook. The first chapter in the audiobook begins to play.

Media Playback and Mute
USB playback will be paused if the system is muted. If the steering wheel mute control is pressed again, playback will resume.

If the source is changed while in mute, playback resumes and audio will unmute.

Auxiliary Jack
This vehicle may have an auxiliary input jack. Possible auxiliary audio sources include:

  • Laptop computer
  • Audio music player

This jack is not an audio output. Do not plug headphones into the auxiliary input jack. Set up an auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P (Park).

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable from the auxiliary device to the auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected, the system can play audio from the device over the vehicle speakers.

If an auxiliary device has already been connected, but a different source is currently active, touch More and then touch AUX to make the source active.

Shuffle and Browse are not available in the AUX source menu.

Bluetooth Audio
Music may be played from a paired Bluetooth device. See Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone) page 157 or Bluetooth (Overview) page 158 for help pairing a device.

Volume and song selection may be controlled by using the infotainment controls or the mobile device. If Bluetooth is selected and no volume is present, check the volume setting on the infotainment system.
Music can be launched by touching Bluetooth from the recent sources list on the left of the display or by touching the More option and then touching the Bluetooth device.

To play music via Bluetooth:

  1. Power on the device, and pair to connect the device.
  2. Once paired, touch Audio from the Home Page, then touch Bluetooth from the recent sources list on the left of the Bluetooth Sound Menu
  3. See “Infotainment System Sound Menu” under AM-FM Radio page 137.

.Manage Bluetooth Devices

From the Home Page:

  1. Touch Audio .
  2. Touch Devices to add or delete devices.

When touching Bluetooth, the radio may not be able to launch the audio player on the connected device to start playing. When the vehicle is not moving, use the mobile device to begin playback.

All devices launch audio differently. When selecting Bluetooth as a source, the radio may show as paused on the display. Press play on the device or touch p on the vehicle display to begin playback.

Browse functionality will be provided where supported by the Bluetooth device. This media content will not be part of the MyMedia source mode.

Some smartphones support sending Bluetooth music information to display on the radio. When the radio receives this information, it will check to see if any is available and display it. For more information about supported Bluetooth features, visit your brand website. See Online Account page 338 for details.

See Radio Frequency Statement page 344.

Navigation

Using the Navigation System
If equipped, launch the Nav application by touching the Nav icon on the Home Page or on the shortcut tray near the bottom of the infotainment display.

When the Nav application is launched for the first time, a product walkthrough is available. Use of the feature requires the Terms and Conditions and the Privacy statement to be confirmed. If available and signed into a profile, it is also suggested to enable and confirm Predictive Navigation.

Predictive Navigation (If Equipped)
If Predictive Navigation is available and confirmed, this feature learns preferences by remembering where the vehicle has been.

It uses the locations and navigation history to personalize routes and results.

Predictive Navigation may learn elements such as:

  • Personalized routes based on preferred streets.
  • Search results that provide best matches at the top of the list.
  • Predictive traffic.
  • Local map content updating.

Predictive Navigation can also be enabled or disabled at a later time by touchingBuick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 005(Options). While in Options, touch Settings, then Map and Navigation Settings, and then Predictive Navigation.

Navigation Map View

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 14

After opening the Nav application for the first time, the application will always open in full map view displaying the vehicle’s current location. When the vehicle is stopped, the search bar will appear along the top of the navigation map view.

Manually close the search bar by touching
When the vehicle is moving, the } (Search) icon will replace the search bar to maximize the full map view.

Destination Card Preferences
From the Nav application, set up Home and Work addresses to enable one-touch navigation. To set up Home and Work addresses, touch Buick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 005 and select Settings, then Map and Navigation Settings, and then Destination Card Preferences. Show Destination Card on Map should be on by default. Select and enter Home and/or Work address and save.

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 15

If the vehicle’s system is not signed into a customized profile, the current location icon uses a generic symbol. Once signed into a customized profile, the current location symbol will show a customized icon. See Navigation Symbols page 144.

Map and Navigation Settings
Touch A while in the map view to display options. The following may display:

  • 3D Heading Up, 2D Heading Up, 2D North Up
  • Show on Map
  • Traffic Events (available with Connected Navigation)
  • Settings
  • Edit Destination (if a route has been set)
  • Avoid on Route (if a route has been set)

Touch Settings to view Map and Navigation Settings. The following may display:

  • Destination Card Preferences
    Map Preferences
  • Route Preferences
    Navigation Voice Control
    Traffic Preferences
    Alert Preferences
    Fuel Grade Preferences
    Manage History
    Predictive Navigation: See “Predictive Navigation (If Equipped)” previously in this section.
  • About

To exit a list, touch z in the top right corner to return to the main map view.
Make sure to set up preferences before setting a destination and starting active guidance.

Map Preferences
Touch to choose between basic map feature configurations

Map Colors

  • Auto – Touch to automatically change modes based on lighting conditions.
  • Day (Light)
  • Night (Dark)

3D Landmarks (Default is On) : Touch On or Off. When turned on, the system will display all 3D Landmarks on the map depending on the zoom level.

3D Buildings (Default is Off) : Touch On or Off. When turned on, the system will display all of the possible 3D building shapes on the map depending on the zoom level.

Show Terrain in 3D (Default is Off) : If equipped, touch On or Off. When turned on, the system will display terrain information on the map in 3D view.

Auto-Zoom (Default is On) : Touch On or Off. When turned on, the system will automatically adjust the zoom level when the vehicle is approaching a turn. After the turn is completed, the system automatically brings the zoom back to the originally set level. If the vehicle is approaching a turn with the next turn occurring shortly after, the Auto-Zoom will remain on until both turns are completed.

Route Preferences
Touch to access the Route Preferences. The choices are:
Preferred Route – Choose from two different route options: Fastest or Eco-Friendly.

  • Fastest would be the route with the shortest drive time.
  • Eco-Friendly would be the most fuel-efficient route.

Avoid on Route – Choose any of the road features to avoid while on route:

  • Highways
  • Unpaved Roads
  • Ferries
  • Carpool Lanes
  • Toll Roads
  • Tunnels
  • Country Borders

Navigation Voice Control
Touch to access the voice control setting display.

  • Navigation Volume – To adjust the volume level, touch the up and down arrows. If the voice guidance prompt is being heard, volume can also be adjusted using the knob on the center stack or the volume switch on the steering wheel.

Navigation Voice Prompt Level During a Call. Options available are:

  • Full Prompt (Selected by default)
  • Tone Only
  • None

Traffic Events (If Equipped)
This feature provides a list of events that are on the route or nearby. Touch Buick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 005 and then select Traffic Events. A connected Navigation service plan is required.

Traffic Preferences (If Equipped)
While in Map View, touchBuick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 005 then Settings and then Map and Navigation Settings to access Traffic Preferences. When Show Traffic on Map is turned on, the feature provides an overview of the traffic flow using different coded colors. The following options are available for rerouting:

  • Auto Reroute to Better Route – The system will automatically reroute if the system detects there is a traffic issue
    • Ask Before Rerouting (Default) – If the system detects there is a traffic issue ahead, it will display a pop-up with details about the Choose to reroute or cancel the alert.
    • Never Search for Better Route – The system will not check for a better route until one of the above options is
  • Alert Preferences
    Set alerts on or off during both inactive and active guidance views. The following alerts may be available:

    • Road Safety Alerts – Touch to display upcoming School Zones.
    • Traffic Camera Alerts

     

Manage History
Touch Manage History to access the History options:

  • Clear Recent Destinations – Touch Buick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 006to clear the recent destinations.
  • Clear Search History – Touch  Buick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 006 to clear the search history.

About
Touch to display software information, such as:

  • Telenav Terms and Conditions
  • Telenav Privacy Statement
  • Navigation Version

Maps
The Navigation application requires a map database to run. It is stored on an SD card that is connected to the infotainment system. If the map database is not available, a missing SD card error message will be displayed.

SD Card Error Messages
The SD card only works for one unique vehicle. The SD card must pass authentication verification to be used for that specific vehicle. If the SD card has a switch that can be set to read-only mode, ensure that it is in the upward position and not in read-only.

Potential error scenarios and messages include:

  • The SD card has initialized for the first time: “Once initialized, this SD card can only be used for navigation in this ”.
  • The SD card is not working properly: “SD card is not functioning properly.

(Error Code).”
See your dealer if this message appears.

  • The SD card is not paired with the existing system: “This SD card is not valid in this vehicle for navigation. See Owner’s Manual for more detail or visit your (Error Code).”
  • The SD card has been removed from the slot: “SD card has been removed.

(Error Code).”

Make sure the SD card is in the slot. If it was removed and inserted and you still receive an error code, see your dealer.

Touch Confirm to resume after the initialization error message. For the other messages, touch OK to return to the Home Page.

Navigation Symbols
Following are the most common symbols that may appear in the Nav application.

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 16

This indicates the vehicle’s current location and direction on the map.

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 17

This is the vehicle’s current location icon during inactive guidance mode. Once a user profile is created, the current location icon can be customized.
This icon indicates the vehicle’s current location and direction on the map.

The destination pin marks the location of the final destination. Touch the pin to view the destination address or to add it or remove it from the Favorites list. Hide the information by touching the pin one more time. It will automatically time out if no action is taken.

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 19

If equipped, smart Points of Interest (POIs) are places of interest for parking and gas  station .

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 20

The progress bar provides an overview of the route progress and may show traffic and incidents along the way. As the route proceeds, the vehicle icon moves up the bar.
Touch the icon to zoom out on the map and view the entire route. Touch it again to return to the previous view.
View the drive time by touching the estimated time of arrival (ETA).

Current Location
When the vehicle is parked and not in a Navigation session, the user icon is centered on the map view, highlighting the current location.

Destination
Receiving Destination Directions from Different Sources

Destinations can be received or transferred from different sources to the Nav application for route guidance. If equipped, some of these sources may include:

  • Navigation from search
  • An address from the Contacts
  • An application on the smartphone that can send destinations to the vehicle.

Waypoints
Add up to five waypoints, which are additional destinations, along the route. To add an additional stop or waypoint:

  1. From active guidance, touch }.
  2. Search for the destination using One-Box, Voice search, or the Quick Category icons.
  3. Choose search results Along Route, Nearby, or Near Destination.
  4. Choose the desired waypoint and touch Add to Trip or replace the current destination by touching New Destination

Route options are not available for waypoints.

Arriving at a Waypoint
When approaching a waypoint, the system will display a Destination Arrival view. To continue on to the next destination touch the Drive to message on the infotainment display.
If the vehicle passes the waypoint or gets out of the current route, the system will automatically reroute back to this waypoint.
At the same time, it will show a Drive to icon along with the next waypoint address so the current waypoint can be skipped and guidance can resume to the next waypoint or destination.

Editing a Waypoint
When waypoints are added during active guidance, the system allows a stop to be deleted or the order to be changed. To edit a waypoint:

  1. TouchBuick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 005.
  2. Touch Edit Destinations.
    • Modify destination order by touching and holding the arrow until it is highlighted. Drag to move the waypoint up or down the list.
    • Delete a waypoint by touching Y.
      A pop-up will appear to confirm waypoint removal. Once the request is confirmed, the system will remove the address from the destinations list.
      Touch z on the top right corner so the system can recalculate the route.
      If there is only one address in the destinations list, the system will disable the move and delete functions. The system will not allow the final destination to be deleted

Map Information
Road network attributes are contained in the map database for map information.

Attributes include information such as street names, street addresses, and turn restrictions. A detailed area includes all major highways, service roads, and residential roads. The detailed areas include Places of Interest (POIs) such as restaurants, airports, banks, hospitals, police stations, gas stations, tourist attractions, and historical monuments.

If the vehicle does not have an applicable service plan, the map database may not include data for newly constructed areas or map database corrections that are completed after production. The navigation system provides full route guidance in the detailed map areas.

Zoom Control
The zoom control display is shown on the map view. A few ways to zoom in or out are:

  • Touch + or – to zoom in or out on the map.
  • Double tap with one finger to zoom in or single tap with two fingers to zoom out on the map.
  • Use the index finger and thumb to zoom out by pinching and then zoom in by spreading those two fingers on the map.

Map Gestures and Map Scale
Use the following gestures on the infotainment display to adjust the map scale and display options.

  • Pinch to zoom in or out.
  • Pan the map.
  • Use two fingers to tilt down and change from 2D to 3D. Tilt up to change back to 2D.
    • Rotate the map.

See Using the System page 131.

  • Mute
    When in active guidance, the audio prompts while using navigation can be muted. Touch the speaker icon on the right side of the upper bar. A slash will appear on the speaker to indicate voice guidance is muted.

Active Guidance View
When a destination is chosen and a navigation session is active, the navigation system enters into an Active Guidance View (AGV).

Map Orientation
Touch Buick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 005 on the map to access map orientation settings. Map orientation is 3D Heading Up by default.

Available settings are:

  • 3D Heading Up (Default): 3D map with the vehicle pointing up. In this mode, the current location icon will always head up and the map will rotate around it.
  • 2D Heading Up: 2D map with the vehicle pointing up. In this mode, the current location icon will always head up and the map will rotate around it.
  • 2D North Up: 2D map with North pointing up. In this mode, the current location icon will shift as the vehicle turns left and

Touch the icon to change the map type. The icon and label will also update accordingly.

Depending on the zoom level of the 2D Heading Up and 3D Heading Up maps, the system may automatically switch to the 2D North Up map.

When in AGV, the entire route can be viewed in 2D North Up by touching the traffic bar. The map will zoom out and readjust to display the full route. When in 2D North Up Route View, the Recenter icon will appear in the middle of the display. Touch either the Recenter icon or the traffic bar again to return to the previous view, either 2D or 3D.

Lane Guidance
The map will display the lane information for the upcoming maneuver if it is available.

  • Junction View
    When a vehicle is on the highway and approaching the exit, an image displays the lane that the vehicle must stay in to complete the next maneuver.
  • Quick-Turn View
  • Buick-Encore-GX-2023-Owners-Manual-Auto-User-Guide 16
  • When the vehicle is approaching a turn with the next turn following in quick succession, a quick-turn list appears below the primary turn indicator. An audio prompt will announce the quick turn.

Auto-Zoom
When approaching a maneuver, the map will automatically zoom in to show both the vehicle icon and the upcoming maneuver to give a better view of the maneuver. Once the maneuver is complete, the system will zoom back to the previous zoom level.
Touch Buick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 005 on the map to access Settings then touch Map Preferences to access Auto-Zoom. This feature can be enabled or disabled.

Directions
Touch the menu option next to the next turn street name to display Directions.
Directions displays the turns and directions from the current location to the final destination.

Editing Directions
Directions can be edited by choosing y, which expands the list to fill the display and enters the Edit Mode. While in Edit Mode, an unwanted route segment can be removed from the route by touching Y next to the segment. A pop-up appears to confirm segment removal.

When the route segment has been removed, all segments are replaced by an activity indicator while the new route is recalculated. When the recalculation is complete, the activity indicator is replaced with the new route segments.

Highway Exits List

Buick-Encore-GX-2023-Owners-Manual-Auto-User-Guide 17Touch Buick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 007 to open the Exit list. This icon displays next to the current street name near the bottom of the display. The icon only appears when on a highway with defined exits.

While traveling on roads with designated exits, an Exit list may be available. The Exit list displays the exit number, distance to the exit from the current vehicle position, and convenience stops that may be available, such as gas, coffee, food, and lodging.

Next Maneuver Menu
When in Active Guidance, the Next Maneuver Turn Arrow, Street Name, and Maneuver Distance are shown in the Next Maneuver at the top of the display overlaying the map. ETA, Distance to Destination, and Traffic Indicator are displayed in a panel pinned on the right of the display.
Navigation Next Turn Maneuver Alert If the Navigation application is not open when a near maneuver prompt is given, it is shown as an alert. Touch the alert to go to the main navigation view or touch to dismiss the alert.

Repeat Voice Guidance

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 23

This symbol indicates the next guidance maneuver. Touch it to repeat the last  spoken guidance instruction.

Incident Alert (If Equipped)
During active guidance, if the system determines that there is an incident ahead but there is not a better route, the system will play a tone and show a Quick Notice.
This will only show once per incident.

Incident Reports (If Equipped)
Incident report icons, along with traffic flow data, display on the map during both active and inactive guidance.

End Route
Touch Cancel at the top right corner to end active guidance and return to inactive guidance. If active guidance is canceled before the destination has been reached, a pop-up option to Resume Trip will appear.

Resume Trip
The trip can be resumed if it was canceled by touching the Resume Trip pop-up option.

If the system has determined that the destination has been reached, either because the arrival view displayed or the destination has been passed, the Resume Trip option will not appear.

Favorites

The navigation favorites can have contacts, addresses, or POIs that have been saved through the favorite icon on the details view.

Accessing Favorites
In the Nav application, view the Favorites list by touching Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007 in the search bar along the top of the Nav map view. If the search bar is closed, touch Buick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 008and Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 007select .

Saving Favorites

Favorites can be added from a number of the system’s applications. Touch the favorites icon to save content as a favorite.

Renaming Navigation Favorites

  1. Touch the Settings icon on the Home Page and touch the System tab.
  2. Touch Favorites to access the Manage Favorites option.
  3. Touch a saved Navigation favorite to access the edit Touch the edit icon to rename the favorite.
  4. Touch Save to store the renamed favorite.
Recents

Touch  to access a list of recent destinations.

Recenter Position Icon
Touch the Recenter Position arrow in the middle of the map view to reset the map to the current location.

Last Parked Location
The Last Parked Location is the last location the vehicle engine was turned off. That location is displayed in the first row of the Recents list. Touching the last Parked Location shows the Address Details view to either save the address or drive to it. The Last Parked Location can be deleted by entering the Edit display. Once the Last Parked Location is deleted, it no longer appears in the Recents list, unless the vehicle is started at that location again.

Show POI Icons

To see the POI categories, touch Options, then touch Show on Map. Up to eight categories of icons can be selected.

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 30

The smart POI icons such as fuel stations and parking may appear based on time, location, driver search behavior, driving conditions, and vehicle conditions.

Touch a smart POI icon to open the corresponding details:

  • Left side: Name and address of the
  • Right side: E + ETE (Estimated Time )

Smart Fuel Station Icons
Fuel station prices are shown if available for nearby stations when the vehicle is low on fuel.

Smart Parking Icons
When reaching a densely populated destination and the system determines that parking may be limited, the system will attempt to display nearby parking destinations with pricing information, if available.

Report an Issue Using POI Details (If Equipped)
In the POI details page, a POI issue can be reported if the data is not accurate or the address is incorrect. Touch Report an Issue near the bottom of the display to access the issue selection page. Touch one of the predefined issues on the selection page, then touch Send. The system will send the information for analysis.

Search
Touch Search on the infotainment display to open the search display. It has a search field entry box, quick category icon shortcuts, recents icon, favorites icon, and keyboard.

Auto Complete
Enter a partial location in the field entry box on the search display. Auto complete will attempt to complete the destination based on what is being entered. Touch the suggested item to search.

Search While in Motion with No Front Seat Passenger Present
The search display will not allow changes or text input with the keyboard when the vehicle is in motion. As a result, a display showing three rows of the most commonly used categories appears. Touching the search box will activate speech recognition.

Search While in Motion with Front Seat Passenger Present
If the system detects that the front seat passenger is present with both driver and passenger seat belts buckled, touching the search icon will display an alert message that allows the passenger to search for a destination as if the vehicle were stopped.

Connected Navigation
Connected Navigation is a subscription service that enables certain capabilities within the navigation system, such as Traffic, Smart Search/Routing, and Predictive Navigation capabilities. The system will show an alert when the subscription is expiring and will ask to renew the plan.

Global Positioning System (GPS)
If equipped, the position of the vehicle is determined by using satellite signals, various vehicle signals, and map data.

At times, other interference such as the satellite condition, road configuration, condition of the vehicle, and/or other circumstances can affect the navigation system’s ability to determine the accurate position of the vehicle.

The GPS shows the current position of the vehicle using signals sent by GPS satellites. When the vehicle is not receiving signals from the satellites, a symbol appears in the status bar.

This system might not be available or interference can occur if any of the following are true:

  • Signals are obstructed by tall buildings, trees, large trucks, or a tunnel.
  • Satellites are being repaired or improved.

For more information if the GPS is not functioning properly, see

Problems with Route Guidance page  151.and If the System Needs Service page  151.

Vehicle Positioning
At times, the position of the vehicle on the map could be inaccurate due to one or more of the following reasons:

  • The road system has changed.
  • The vehicle is driving on slippery road surfaces such as sand, gravel, or snow.
  • The vehicle is traveling on winding roads or long, straight roads.
  • The vehicle is approaching a tall building or a large vehicle.
  • The surface streets run parallel to a freeway.
  • The vehicle has been transferred by a vehicle carrier or a ferry.
  • The current position calibration is set incorrect
  • The vehicle is traveling at high speed.
  • The vehicle changes directions more than once, or the vehicle is turning on a turn table in a parking lot.
  • The vehicle is entering and/or exiting a parking lot, garage, or a lot with a roof.
  • The GPS signal is not received.
  • A roof carrier is installed on the vehicle.
  • Tire chains are installed on the vehicle.
  • The tires are replaced or wom.
  • The tire pressure for the tires is  incorrect .
  • This is the first navigation use after the map data is updated.
  • The 12-volt battery has been disconnected for several days.
  • The vehicle is driving in heavy traffic where driving is at low speeds, and the vehicle is stopped and started repeatedly.

Problems with Route Guidance

Inappropriate route guidance can occur under one or more of the following conditions:

  • The turn was not made on the road indicator.
  • Route guidance might not be available when using automatic rerouting for the next right or left turn.
  • The route might not be changed when using automatic rerouting.
  • There is no route guidance when turning at an intersection.
  • Plural names of places might be announced occasionally.

It could take a long time to operate automatic rerouting during high-speed driving.

  • Automatic rerouting might display a route returning to the set waypoint if heading for a destination without passing through a set waypoint.
  • The route prohibits the entry of a vehicle due to a regulation by time or season or any other regulation which may be given.
  • Some routes might not be shown if there are new roads, if roads have recently changed, or if certain roads are not listed in the map data. See Maps page 143.

To recalibrate the vehicle’s position on the map, park with the vehicle running for two to five minutes, until the vehicle position updates. Make sure the vehicle is parked in a location that is safe and has a clear view of the sky and away from large obstructions.

If the System Needs Service
If the navigation system needs service, see your dealer.

Map Data Updates
The map data in the vehicle is the most up-to-date information available when the vehicle was produced. The map data is updated periodically, provided that the map information has changed and the vehicle has a relevant service plan.

See www.gmnavdisc.com for details on ordering, purchasing, and installing a new or replacement SD card. Features are subject to change. For more information on this feature, visit your brand website. Online
Account page 338 for details.

If the vehicle is equipped with Connected Navigation, which is a subscription service that enables certain features of the navigation system, such as Traffic, Smart Search/Routing, and Predictive Navigation, then the system will download the latest map data from the cloud.

Database Coverage Explanations
Coverage areas vary with respect to the level of map detail available for any given area. Some areas feature greater levels of detail than others. If this happens, it does not mean there is a problem with the system. As the map data is updated, more detail can become available for areas that previously had limited detail. See Map Data Updates 0151.

Voice Recognition
If equipped, voice recognition allows for hands-free operation within the navigation, audio, phone, and weather applications. This feature can be started by pressing g on the steering wheel or touching g on the infotainment display.

However, not all features within these areas are supported by voice commands.

Generally, only complex tasks that require multiple manual interactions to complete are supported by voice commands.

For example, tasks that take more than one or two touches, such as a song or artist to play from a media device, would be supported by voice commands. Other tasks, like adjusting the volume or seeking up or down, are audio features that are easily performed by touching one or two options, and are not supported by voice commands.

In general there are flexible ways to speak commands for completing the tasks.

If your language supports it, try stating a one-shot command, such as “Directions to address <number, street, city, state/ province>.” Do not include the ZIP code while stating the address during the

command. Another example of a one-shot Destination Entry command is, “Directions to Place of Interest at <hotel>.” If these commands do not work, try saying, “Take me to Place of Interest” or “Find address” and the system will walk you through by asking additional questions.

Hybrid Speech Recognition
If equipped, this feature helps distinguish words by using Internet-based information along with the system’s voice recognition database. This allows you to speak more naturally when using voice recognition.

Using Voice Recognition
Voice recognition becomes available once the system has been initialized. This begins when the ignition is turned on. Initialization may take a few moments.

  1. Press g on the steering wheel controls to activate voice recognition.
  2. The audio system mutes and the system plays a prompt.
  3. Clearly speak one of the commands described in this section.

A voice recognition system prompt can be interrupted while it is playing by pressing again.

Once voice recognition is started, both the infotainment display and instrument cluster show the selections and visual dialog content. These displays can be turned on or off in the Tutorial Mode under Settings page 162 .

There are three voice prompt modes supported:

  • Informative verbal prompts: This type of prompt will provide more information regarding the supported actions.
  • Short prompts: This type of prompt will provide simple instructions about what can be stated.
  • Auto informative prompts: This type of prompt plays during the first few speech sessions, then automatically switches to the short prompt after some experience has been gained through using the system.

If a command is not spoken, the voice recognition system says a help prompt.

Prompts and Infotainment Displays
While a voice recognition session is active, there may be corresponding options showing on the displays. A selection can be made by manually touching the option, or by speaking the number for the option to select. Manual interaction in the voice recognition session is permitted. Interaction during a voice session may be completed entirely using voice commands while some manual commands may expedite a task. If a selection is made using a manual control, the voice recognition dialog will progress in the same way as if the selection were made using a voice command. Once the system completes the task, or the session is terminated, the voice recognition dialog stops.

An example of this type of manual intervention is touching an entry of a displayed number list instead of speaking the number associated with the entry desired.

Canceling Voice Recognition
Touch or say “Cancel” or “Exit” to terminate the voice recognition session and show the display where voice recognition was initiated.

Press on the steering wheel controls to terminate the voice recognition session and show the display where voice recognition was initiated

Natural Language Commands
Most languages do not support natural language commands in sentence form. For those languages, use direct commands like the examples shown on the display.

Helpful Hints for Speaking Commands
Voice recognition can understand commands that are naturally stated in sentence form or direct commands that state the application and the task.

For best results:

  • Listen for the prompt before saying a command or reply.
  • Speak the command naturally, not too fast, not too slow.
  • Use direct commands without a lot of extra For example, “Call <name> at work,” “Play” followed by the artist or song name, or “Tune” followed by the radio station number.
  • Navigation destinations can be made in a single command using keywords. A few examples are: “I want directions to an address,” “I need to find a place of interest or (POI),” or “Find contact.”

The system responds by requesting more details. For other POIs, say the name of a category like “Restaurants,” “Shopping Malls,” or “Hospitals.”

  • Navigating to a destination outside of the current country takes more than one command. The first command is to tell the system where the navigation will take place, such as an Address, Intersection, POI, or If Address or Intersection is selected, the second command is to say, “Change Country.” Once the system responds, say the country before saying the rest of the address and/or intersection.

If POI is asked for, say “Change Location,” then “Change Country.”

Direct commands might be more clearly understood by the system. An example of a direct command would be “Call <number>.” Examples of these direct commands are displayed on most of the screens while a voice session is active. If “Phone” or “Phone Commands,” is spoken, the system understands that a phone call is requested and will respond with questions until enough details are gathered to make a call.

If a cell phone number has been saved with a name and a place, the direct command should include both, for example “Call <name> at work.”

Using Voice Recognition for List Options
When a list is displayed, a voice prompt will ask to confirm or select an option from that list.

When a display contains a list, there may be options that are available but not displayed. The list on a voice recognition screen functions the same as a list on other displays. Scrolling or flinging can be used to help display other entries from the list.

Manually scrolling or paging the list on a display during a voice recognition session suspends the current voice recognition event and plays the prompt “Please select manually or touch the Back icon on the infotainment display to try again.”

If manual selection takes more than 15 seconds, the session terminates and prompts that it has timed out. The display returns to the display where voice recognition was initiated.

The Back Command
Say “Back” or touch the Back icon on the infotainment display to go to the previous menu.

If in voice recognition, and “Back” is spoken all the way back to the starting display, and then “Back” is spoken one more time, the voice recognition session will cancel.

Help
Say “Help” on any voice recognition display and the help prompt for the display is played.

Voice Recognition for the Radio
If browsing the audio sources when voice is touched, the voice recognition commands for AM, FM, and SiriusXM (if equipped) are available.

“Switch to AM” : Switch bands to AM and tune to the last AM radio station.

“Switch to FM” : Switch bands to FM and tune to the last FM radio station.

“Switch to SXM” : Switch bands to SiriusXM and tune to the last SiriusXM channel.

“Tune to <AM frequency> AM” : Tune to the radio station whose frequency is identified in the command (like “nine fifty”).

“Tune to <FM frequency> FM” : Tune to the radio station whose frequency is identified in the command (like “one oh one point one”).

“Tune to <AM frequency> AM HD” : Tune to the HD Radio station (if equipped) whose frequency is identified in the command.

“Tune to <FM frequency> FM HD” : Tune to the HD Radio station (if equipped) whose frequency is identified in the command.

“Tune to <FM frequency> FM HD <HD channel number>” : Tune to the HD Radio station (if equipped) whose frequency and HD channel are identified in the command.

“Tune to SXM <SXM channel number>” : Tune to the SiriusXM radio station whose channel number is identified in the command.

“Tune to SXM <SXM channel name>” : Tune to the SiriusXM radio station whose channel name is identified in the command.

Voice Recognition for Audio MyMedia

The available voice recognition commands for [browsing] MyMedia are:

“Play Artist” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific artist name.

“Play Artist <artist name>” : Begin playback of a specific artist.

“Play Album” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific album name.

“Play Album <album name>” : Begin playback of a specific album.

“Play Song” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific song name.

“Play Song <song name>” : Begin playback of a specific song, if available.

“Play Genre” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific genre.

“Play Genre <genre name>” : Begin playback of a specific genre.

“Play Playlist” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific playlist name.

“Play Playlist <playlist name>” : Begin playback of a specific playlist.

“Play <device name>” : Play music from a specific device identified by name. The device name is the name displayed on the display when the device is first selected as an audio source.

“Play Chapter” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific name.

“Play Chapter <chapter name>” : Begin playback of a specific chapter.

“Play Audiobook” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific audiobook.

“Play Audiobook <audiobook name>” : Begin playback of a specific audiobook.

“Play Episode” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific name.

“Play Episode <episode name>” : Begin playback of a specific episode.

“Play Podcast” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific podcast.

“Play Podcast <podcast name>” : Begin playback of a specific podcast.

“My Media” : Begin a dialog to enter the desired media content.

Handling Large Amounts of Media Content
It is expected that large amounts of media content will be brought into the vehicle.

It may be necessary to handle large amounts of media content in a different way than smaller amounts of media. The system may limit the options of voice recognition by not allowing selection of files by voice at the highest level if the number of files exceeds the maximum limit.

Changes to voice commands due to media content limits are:

  • Files including other individual files of all media types such as songs, audiobook chapters, podcast episodes, and videos.
  • Album type folders including types such as albums and audiobooks.

There are no restrictions if the number of files and albums is fewer than 12,000. When the number of files connected to the system is between 12,000 and 24,000, the content cannot be accessed directly with one command like “Play <song name>.”

The restriction is that the command “Play Song” must be spoken first; the system will then ask for the song name. The reply command would be to say the name of the song to play.

Similar limits exist for album content.
If there are more than 12,000 albums, but fewer than 24,000, the content cannot be accessed directly with one command like, “Play <album name>.” The command “Play Album” must first be spoken; the system will then ask for the album name. The reply would be to say the name of the album to play.

Once the number of files has exceeded approximately 24,000, there is no support for accessing the songs directly through voice commands. There will still be access to the media content by using commands for playlists, artists, and genres.

The access commands for playlists, artists, and genres are prohibited after the number of this type of media exceeds 12,000.

The system will provide feedback the first time voice recognition is initiated if it has become apparent that any of these limits are reached during a device initializing process.

Voice recognition performance will degrade to some extent based on many factors when adding large amounts of data to recognize. If this is the case, perhaps accessing songs through playlists or artist name would work better.

Voice Recognition for Navigation (If Equipped)

Navigation” : Begin a dialog to enter specific destination information.

“Navigation Commands” : Begin a dialog to enter specific destination information.

Address” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific destination address, which includes the entire address consisting of the house number, street name, city, state/province, and country. Do not include the ZIP code.

“Place of Interest” : Begin a dialog to enter a destination Place of Interest category or major brand name.

The name must be precisely spoken. Nicknames or short names for the businesses will not likely be found. Lesser known businesses might have to be located by category, such as fast food, hotels, or banks.

“Navigate to Contact” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific destination contact name.

“Cancel Route” : End route guidance.

“Take Me Home” : Create a route to a stored home location.

Voice Recognition for the Phone

“Call <contact name>” : Initiate a call to a stored contact. The command may include location if the contact has location numbers stored.

“Call <contact> At Home,” “At Work,” “On Mobile,” or “On Other” : Initiate a call to a stored contact and location at home, at work, on mobile device, or on another phone.

“Call <cell phone number>” : Initiate a call to a cell phone number of seven digits, 10 digits, or three digit emergency numbers.

“Pair Phone” : Begin the Bluetooth pairing process. Follow the instructions on the infotainment display.

Redial” : Initiate a call to the last dialed number.

“Switch Phone” : Select a different connected cell phone for outgoing calls.

“Voice Keypad” : Begin a dialog to enter special numbers like international numbers. The numbers can be entered in groups of digits with each group of digits being repeated back by the system. If the group of digits is not correct, the command “Delete” will remove the last group of digits and allow them to be re-entered. Once the entire number has been entered, the command “Call” will start dialing the number.

Phone Assistant Voice Recognition
Press and hold g on the steering wheel controls to pass through and launch Google phone assistant or Siri.

For the low radio, whether connected by Bluetooth or phone projection, the only available voice recognition is either Siri (iPhone) or the Google Assistant (Android).

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)

The Bluetooth-capable system can be paired with up to 10 Bluetooth devices and two active Bluetooth devices, allowing:

  • Placement and receipt of calls in a hands-free mode.
  • Sharing of the device’s address book or contact list with the vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction, before driving, and with the vehicle parked:

  • Become familiar with the features of the mobile Organize the phone book and contact lists clearly and delete duplicate or rarely used entries.

If possible, program speed dial or other shortcuts.

  • Review the controls and operation of the infotainment system.
  • Pair mobile device(s) to the vehicle. The system may not work with all mobile See “Pairing” later in this section.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth-capable mobile device with a Hands-Free Profile to make and receive phone calls. The infotainment system and voice recognition are used to control the system. The system can be used while the ignition is on or in accessory mode. The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all mobile devices support all functions and not all mobile devices work with the Bluetooth system. Visit your brand website for more information about compatible mobile devices. See Online Account page 338.

Controls
Use the controls on the center stack and the steering wheel to operate the Bluetooth system.

Steering Wheel Controls
Buick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 009Press to answer incoming calls and start voice recognition on your connected Bluetooth mobile device.

Buick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 0010Press to end a call, decline a call, or cancel an operation. Press to mute or unmute the infotainment system when not on a call.

Infotainment System Controls
For information about how to navigate the menu system using the infotainment controls, see Overview page 129.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth mobile device system, sound comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system. The volume level while on a mobile device call can be adjusted by pressing the steering wheel controls or the volume control on the center stack. The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later calls. The volume cannot be lowered beyond a certain level.

Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone) Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled mobile device must be paired to the Bluetooth system and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used. See the mobile device manufacturer’s user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the device.

Pairing Information
If no mobile device has been connected, the Phone main page on the infotainment display will show the Connect Phone option. Touch this option to connect.

Another way to connect is to touch the Phones tab at the top right of the display and then touch Add Phone.

  • A Bluetooth smartphone with music capability can be paired to the vehicle as a smartphone and a music player at the same time.
  • Up to 10 devices can be paired to the Bluetooth system.
  • The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving.
  • Pairing only needs to be completed once, unless the pairing information on the cell phone changes or the cell phone is deleted from the system.
  • If multiple paired cell phones are within range of the system, the system connects to the paired cell phone that is set to First to Connect. If there is no cell phone set to First to Connect, it will link to the cell phone which was used last. To link to a different paired cell phone, see “Linking to a Different Phone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

  1. Make sure Bluetooth has been enabled on the cell phone before the pairing process is started.
  2. Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page or the phone icon on the shortcut tray near the bottom of the display.
  3. Touch Phones at the top of the infotainment display. There is also a Connect Phones option in the middle of the Phone display which will shortcut to the Phone List menu.
  4. Touch Add
  5. Select the vehicle name shown on the infotainment display from your cell phone’s Bluetooth Settings list.
  6. Follow the instructions on the cell phone to confirm the six-digit code showing on the infotainment display and touch Pair. The code on the cell phone and infotainment display will need to be acknowledged for a successful pair.
  7. Start the pairing process on the cell phone to be paired to the vehicle. See the cell phone manufacturer’s user guide

for information on this process. Once the cell phone is paired, it will show under Connected.

  1. If the vehicle name does not appear on your cell phone, there are a few ways to start the pairing process over:
    • Turn the cell phone off and then back on.
    • Go back to the beginning of the Phone menus on the infotainment display and restart the pairing
    • Reset the cell phone, but this step should be done as a last effort.
  2. If the cell phone prompts to accept connection or allow phone book download, touch Always Accept and The phone book may not be available if not accepted.
  3. Repeat Steps 1−8 to pair additional cell phone.

First to Connect Paired Phones

If multiple paired cell phones are within range of the system, the system connects to the paired cell phone that is set as First to Connect. To enable a paired cell phone as the First to Connect phone:

  1. Make sure the cell phone is turned on.
  2. Touch Settings, then touch system.
  3. Touch Phones to access all paired and all connected cell phones and mobile devices.
  4. Touch the information icon or pencil icon to the right of the cell phone to open the cell phone’s settings menu.
  5. Touch the First to Connect option, to enable the setting for that device.

Cell phones and mobile devices can be added, removed, connected, and disconnected. A sub-menu will display whenever a request is made to add or manage cell phones and mobile devices.

Listing All Paired and Connected Phones

  1. Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page or the phone icon on the shortcut tray near the bottom of the display.
  2. Touch

Disconnecting a Connected Phone

  1. Touch the Phone icon on the Home
  2. Touch
  3. Touch the information icon or the pencil icon next to the connected cell phone or mobile device to show the cell phone’s or mobile device’s information display.
  4. Touch

Deleting a Paired Phone

  1. Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page or the phone icon on the shortcut tray near the bottom of the display.
  2. Touch
  3. Touch the information icon or the pencil icon next to the connected cell phone to display the cell phone’s or mobile device’s information display.
  4. Touch Forget

Linking to a Different Phone
To link to a different cell phone, the new cell phone must be in the vehicle and paired to the Bluetooth system.

  1. Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page or the phone icon on the shortcut tray near the bottom of the display.
  2. Touch
  3. Touch the new cell phone to link to from the not connected phone list. See “First to Connect Paired Phones” previously in this section.

Switching to Handset or Handsfree Mode

To switch between handset or handsfree mode:

  • While the active call is hands-free, touch the Handset option to switch to the handset mode.
    The mute icon will not be available or functional while Handset mode is active.
    While the active call is on the handset, touch the Handset option to switch to the hands-free mode.

Making a Call Using Contacts and Recent Calls
Calls can be made through the Bluetooth system using personal cell phone contact information for all cell phones that support the Phone Book feature. Become familiar with the cell phone settings and operation. Verify the cell phone supports this feature.

The Contacts menu accesses the phone book stored in the cell phone.
The Recents menu accesses the recents call list from your cell phone.

To make a call using the Contacts menu:

  1. Touch the Phone icon on the Home
    Touch
    The Contacts list can be searched by using the first character. Touch A-Z on the infotainment display to scroll through the list of names.
    Touch the name to call.
  1. Touch the desired contact number to To make a call using the Recents menu:
  2. Touch Phone on the Home
  3. Touch phone
  4. Touch the name or number

Making a Call Using the Keypad

To make a call by dialing the numbers:

  1. Touch the Phone icon on the Home
  2. Touch Keypad and enter a phone
  3. Touch on the infotainment display to start dialing the number.

Searching Contacts Using the Keypad

To search for contacts using the keypad:

  1. Touch the Phone icon on the Home
  2. Touch Keypad and enter partial phone numbers or contact names using the digits on the keypad to search.

Results will show on the right side of the display. Touch one to place a call.

Accepting or Declining a Call
When an incoming call is received, the infotainment system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call
There are two ways to accept a call:

  • Press g on the steering wheel
  • Touch Answer on the infotainment

Declining a Call
There are two ways to decline a call:

  • Press Buick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 0010on the steering wheel
  • Touch Ignore on the infotainment

Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth cell phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call
Press Buick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 009 to answer, then touch Switch on the infotainment display.

Declining a Call
PressBuick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 0010 to decline, then touch Ignore on the infotainment display

Switching Between Calls (Call Waiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls, touch Phone on the Home Page to display Call View. While in Call View, touch the call information of the call on hold to change calls.

Three-Way Calling
Three-way calling must be supported on the Bluetooth cell phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.

To start a three-way call while in a current call:

  1. In the Call View, touch Add Call to add another call.
  2. Initiate the second call by selecting from Recents, Contacts, or Keypad.
  3. When the second call is active, touch the merge icon to conference the three-way call together.

Ending a Call
Press Buick Enclave 2023 infortainment system User Manual 0010 on the steering wheel.

  • Touch  on the infotainment display, next to a call, to end only that call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers during a call. This is used when calling a menu-driven phone system. Use the Keypad to enter the number.

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
If equipped, Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay capability may be available through a compatible smartphone. If available, the Android Auto and Apple CarPlay icons will change from gray to color on the Home Page of the infotainment display.

To use Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay:

For Wired Phone Projection

  1. Download the Android Auto app to your smartphone from the Google Play store. There is no app required for Apple carPlay.

Connect your Android phone or Apple iPhone by using the factory-provided phone USB cable and plugging into a USB data port. For best performance, it is highly recommended to use the device’s factory-provided USB cable, which should be replaced after significant wear to maintain connection quality. Aftermarket or third-party cables may not work.

  1. When the phone is first connected to activate Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, accept the terms and conditions on both the infotainment system and the phone.
  2. Follow the instructions on the phone .

The Android Auto and Apple CarPlay icons on the Home Page will illuminate depending on the smartphone. Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay may automatically launch upon USB connection. If not, touch the Android Auto or Apple CarPlay icon on the Home Page to launch.

Press on the center stack to return to the Home Page.

For Wireless Phone Projection

If equipped, verify your phone is wireless compatible by visiting the Google Android Auto or Apple CarPlay support page.

  1. Download the Android Auto app to your smartphone from the Google Play There is no app required for Apple CarPlay.
  2. For first time connection, there are two ways to set up wireless projection:
  • Connect your Android phone or Apple iPhone by using the factory-provided phone USB cable and plugging into a USB data For best performance, it is highly recommended to use the device’s factory-provided USB cable, which should be replaced after significant wear to maintain connection quality. Aftermarket or third-party cables may not work.
  • Connecting the phone over Bluetooth.

USB data port. For best performance, it is highly recommended to use the device’s factory-provided USB cable, which should be replaced after significant wear to maintain connection quality. Aftermarket or third-party cables may not work.

Connecting the phone over Bluetooth.
See Bluetooth (Overview) page 157 or Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone) page 158.

  1. Make sure wireless is turned on the phone for wireless projection to work.
  2. When the phone is first connected to activate Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, agree to the terms and conditions on both the infotainment system and the phone.
  3. Follow the instructions on the phone.

The Android Auto and Apple CarPlay icons on the Home Page will illuminate depending on the smartphone. Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay may automatically launch upon wireless connection. If not, touch the Android Auto or Apple CarPlay icon on the Home Page to launch.
Wireless Carplay and/or Wireless Android Auto may experience occasional service disruption due to outside Wi-Fi interference.

To disconnect the phones wireless projection:

  1. Select Settings from the Home
  2. Select Phones
  3. Touch 4 or the pencil icon next to the phone to be disconnected.
  4. Turn off Apple CarPlay or Android

Press on the center stack to return to the Home Page.

Features are subject to change. For further information on how to set up Android Auto and Apple CarPlay in the vehicle, visit your brand website. See Online Account  page 338 for details.

Android Auto is provided by Google and is subject to Google’s terms and privacy policy. Apple CarPlay is provided by Apple and is subject to Apple’s terms and privacy policy. Data plan rates apply. For Android Auto support and to see if your phone is compatible, see https://support.google.com

android auto. For Apple CarPlay support and to see if your phone is compatible, see www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. Apple or Google may change or suspend availability at any time. Android Auto, Android, Google, Google Play, and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.; Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Press  on the center stack to exit Android Auto or Apple CarPlay. To enter back into Android Auto or Apple CarPlay, press and hold { on the center stack.

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto can be disabled from the infotainment system. To do this, touch Home, Settings, and then touch the Apps tab along the top of the display. Use the On/Off toggled to turn off Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

Settings

Not all vehicles will have all features. Certain settings can be managed in the Owner Center sites when an account is established, and may be modified if other users have accessed the vehicle or created accounts.
This may result in changes to the security or functionality of the infotainment system. Some settings may also be transferred to a new vehicle, if equipped. For instructions, in  the U.S. see my.buick.com or in Canada see mybuick.ca or monbuick.ca.

The settings menu may be organized into four categories. Select the desired category by touching System, Apps, Vehicle, or Personal.

To access the personalization menus:

  1. Touch Settings on the Home Page on the infotainment display.
  2. Touch the desired category to display a list of available options.
  3. Touch to select the desired feature
  4. Touch the options on the infotainment display to disable or enable a feature.
  5. Touch z to go to the top level of the Settings menu.

System
The menu may contain the following:

Time / Date
Allows setting of the clock.

Language
Sets the display language used on the infotainment display. It may also use the selected language for voice recognition and audio feedback.

Phones
Allows connecting to a different cell phone or mobile device source, disconnect a cell phone or media device, or delete a cell phone or media device.

Wi-Fi Networks
Shows connected and available Wi-Fi networks.

If a 4G LTE data package is not active on the vehicle, the infotainment system can be connected to an external protected Wi-Fi network, such as a mobile device or home hotspot, to utilize connected services.

Wi-Fi Hotspot
Allows adjustment of different Wi-Fi features.

Privacy
Allows adjustment of the infotainment privacy settings.

Device Remote Access
Allows devices to interact with vehicle features and access data.

Display
Allows adjustment of the infotainment display.

Sounds
Allows adjustment of the infotainment system sounds.

Voice
Allows adjustment of the infotainment voice recognition features.

Favorites
Allows adjustment of the infotainment favorite settings.

Updates
If equipped, the vehicle can download and install select software updates over a wireless connection. The system will prompt for certain updates to be downloaded and installed. There is also an option to check for updates manually.

To manually check for updates, touch Settings on the Home Page and select the System tab. Go to the Vehicle Software section and touch Updates. Follow the on-screen prompts. The steps to check for, download, and install updates may vary by vehicle.

The vehicle can be used normally during the software download. Once the download is complete, there may be a prompt to accept the installation of the update upon the next ignition cycle or the next time the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). For most updates, the vehicle will be disabled and cannot be driven during the installation. The system will deliver messages indicating success or error during and after the download and installation processes.

Downloading Over-the-Air vehicle software updates requires Internet connectivity, which can be accessed through the vehicle’s built-in 4G LTE connection, if equipped and active. If required, data plans are provided by a third party. Optionally, a secure Wi-Fi hotspot such as a compatible mobile device hotspot, home hotspot, or public hotspot can be used. Applicable data rates may apply.

To connect the infotainment system to a secured mobile device hotspot, home hotspot, or public hotspot, touch Settings on the Home Page, select the System tab, followed by Wi-Fi Networks. Select the appropriate Wi-Fi network, and follow the on-screen prompts. Download speeds may vary.

On most compatible mobile devices, activation of the Wi-Fi hotspot is in the Settings menu under Mobile Network Sharing, Personal Hotspot, Mobile Hotspot, or similar.

Availability of Over-the-Air software updates varies by vehicle and country. Features are subject to change. For more information on this feature, see Online Account page 339 for details.

Preferences
Allows the infotainment system to disable or enable the download of new updates in the background.

About
Shows the infotainment system software information

Running Applications
Shows a complete list of applications that are currently running on the infotainment system.

Return to Factory Settings
Allows resetting the infotainment system settings in the vehicle.

Apps
The menu may contain the following:

Android Auto
Allows interacting directly with a mobile device on the infotainment display. See Apple CarPlay and Android Auto page 164.

Apple CarPlay
Allows interacting directly with a mobile device on the infotainment display. See Apple CarPlay and Android Auto page 164.

Apps
Shows app settings and information.

Audio
Adjusts different audio settings.

Climate
Adjusts different climate settings.

Navigation
Adjusts different navigation settings. See Using the Navigation System page 140.
Phone Adjusts different phone settings.

SiriusXM
Adjusts different SiriusXM settings.

Vehicle
The menu may contain the following:

Rear Seat Reminder
Allows for a chime and a message when the rear door has been opened before or during operation of the vehicle.

Climate and Air Quality
Adjusts different climate settings.

Collision/Detection Systems
Adjusts different driver assistance system settings.

Comfort and Convenience
Adjusts different comfort and convenience settings.

Lighting
Adjusts different lighting settings.

Power Door Locks
Adjusts different door lock settings. Remote Lock, Unlock, and Start Adjusts different remote lock settings. Seating Position

Adjusts different seat settings.

Valet Mode
This will lock the infotainment system and steering wheel controls. It may also limit access to vehicle storage locations, if equipped.

To enable valet mode:

  1. Enter a four-digit code on the keypad.
  2. Select Enter to go to the confirmation screen.
  3. Re-enter the four-digit code.
    Touch Lock or Unlock to lock or unlock the system. Touch Back to go back to the previous menu.
Personal

If equipped, this menu allows adjustment of different user profile settings. See “Users” in Using the System page 131 for information on setting up user profiles.

The menu may contain the following:

Name
Edit your user name that will be displayed in the vehicle.

Vehicle Account Information
View the vehicle account information and to change the account password.

An “unverified user account” pop-up will display until the account information verification process has been completed on the Internet. Check your registered e-mail account for an activation e-mail to complete the verification process.

Profile Picture
Choose or change your profile picture.

Profile Identifiers
Have the vehicle recognize the identifier you choose.

If the remote key is lost or stolen, see your dealer.

Security
Have your profile secured with a PIN.

Vehicle Name
Edit the vehicle name.

Vehicle Account
View the vehicle account information and to change the account password.

Delete Profile
Remove the profile from the vehicle.

Teen Driver
If equipped, this allows multiple keys to be registered for beginner drivers to encourage safe driving habits. When the vehicle is started with a Teen Driver key, it will automatically activate certain safety systems, allow setting of some features, and limit the use of others. The Report Card will record vehicle data about driving behavior that can be viewed later. When the vehicle is started with a registered key, the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays a message that Teen Driver is active.

To access:

  1. Touch Settings on the Home Page, then touch Vehicle, and then Teen Driver.
  2. Create a Personal Identification Number (PIN) by choosing a four-digit PIN.

Re-enter the PIN to confirm. To change the PIN, touch Change PIN.

The PIN is required to:

  • Set up/Add or remove keys.
  • Change Teen Driver setting.
  • Change or clear the Teen Driver PIN.
  • Access or delete Report Card data.

Set up/Add keys to activate Teen Driver and assign restrictions to the key:

Any vehicle key can be registered, up to a maximum of eight keys. Label the key to tell it apart from the other keys.

For a pushbutton start system:

  1. Start the Vehicle.
  2. For automatic transmissions, the vehicle must be in P (Park). For manual transmissions, the vehicle must be stopped with the parking brake set.
  3. From the Settings menu, touch Vehicle and then Teen Driver.
  4. Enter the PIN.

Place the remote key you wish to register in the transmitter pocket. The key does not need to be the one that

started the vehicle. See Remote Key Operation 07 for transmitter pocket location.

  1. From the Teen Driver menu, touch Setup Keys or Add/Remove Teen Driver Keys.
  • If the remote key has not previously been registered, the option to add the key displays. Touch Add and a confirmation message displays. Teen Driver restrictions will be applied whenever this remote key is used to operate the vehicle.
  • If the remote key has already been registered, the option to remove the key displays. If Remove is touched, the remote key is no longer registered. A confirmation message displays, and Teen Driver restrictions will not be applied if this remote key is used to operate the vehicle.

In vehicles with a pushbutton start system, if a Teen Driver and a non-Teen Driver key are both present at start up, the vehicle will recognize the non-Teen Driver key to start the vehicle. The Teen Driver settings will not be active.

For a keyed ignition system:

  1. Start the vehicle.
  2. For automatic transmissions, the vehicle must be in P (Park). For manual transmissions, the vehicle must be stopped with the parking brake set.
  3. From the Settings menu, touch Vehicle and then Teen Driver.
  4. Enter the PIN.
  5. Touch Setup Keys or Add/Remove Teen Driver Keys. The system displays instructions for registering or unregistering a key. A confirmation message displays.

Manage Settings or Teen Driver Settings

Depending on the options of your vehicle, the following menu items may be displayed:

Buckle to Drive : When turned ON, Buckle to Drive prevents the driver from shifting out of P (Park) for a period of time after the brake pedal is pressed if the driver, or on some vehicles the detected passenger, has not buckled their seat belt. On some vehicles, Buckle to Drive is always ON when Teen Driver is active and is not configurable.

Audio Volume Limit : Allows a maximum audio volume to be set. Turn the audio volume limit on or off. Use the arrows to choose the maximum allowable level for the audio volume. On some infotainment systems, touch Set Audio Volume Limit to choose the maximum allowable audio volume level.

Set Audio Volume Limit : Use the arrows to choose the maximum allowable level for the audio volume.

Teen Driver Speed Limiter : Limits the maximum speed of the vehicle. When the speed limiter is turned on and the vehicle is started with a Teen Driver key, the DIC displays a message that the top speed is limited.

On certain vehicles, when the Speed Limiter is turned ON, the vehicle’s maximum acceleration will be limited. The DIC will display a message that the acceleration is limited.

Teen Driver Speed Warning : Displays a warning in the DIC when exceeding a selectable speed. Turn the speed warning on or off and choose the desired speed warning level. The speed warning does not limit the speed of the vehicle. On some infotainment systems, touch Set Teen Driver Speed Warning to set the warning speed.

Set Teen Driver Speed Warning : Choose the desired speed warning level. The speed warning does not limit the speed of the vehicle.

SiriusXM Explicit Content Filter : Allows the SiriusXM Explicit Content Filter to be turned ON or OFF. When ON, the teen driver will not be able to listen to SiriusXM stations that contain explicit content, and the Explicit Content Filter selection in the Audio Settings will be unavailable for change.

When Teen Driver is Active:

  • If equipped, the radio will mute when the driver seat belt, and in some vehicles the front passenger seat belt, is not buckled. The audio from any device paired to the vehicle will also be muted.
  • An object placed on the front passenger seat, such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device, could cause the passenger sensing system to falsely sense an unbuckled front passenger and mute the radio.

If this happens, remove the object from the seat. See Passenger Sensing System page 60.

Some safety systems, such as Automatic Emergency Braking, if equipped, cannot be turned off.
The gap setting for Adaptive Cruise Control and alert timing for Forward Collision Alert, if equipped, cannot be When trying to change a safety feature that is not configurable in Teen Driver, the feature may be grayed out or removed from the infotainment menu, or the DIC will display a message indicating that Teen Driver is active and the action is not available.

Super Cruise, if equipped, is not available.
Enhanced Low Fuel Warning (if equipped)

  • When the vehicle is low on fuel, the low fuel light on the instrument cluster flashes and the DIC low fuel warning cannot be dismissed.
  • Do not tow a trailer if equipped with Automatic Emergency Braking.

Report Card
The vehicle owner must secure the driver’s consent to record certain vehicle data when the vehicle is driven with a registered Teen Driver key. There is one Report Card per vehicle. Data is only recorded when a registered Teen Driver key is used to operate the vehicle.

The Report Card data is collected from the time Teen Driver is activated or the last time the Report Card was reset. The following items may be recorded:

  • Distance Driven – the total distance
  • Maximum Speed – the maximum vehicle speed detected.
  • Overspeed Warnings – the number of times the speed warning setting was exceeded.
  • Wide Open Throttle – the number of times the accelerator pedal was pressed nearly all the way down.
  • Forward Collision Alerts (if equipped) – the number of times the driver was notified when approaching a vehicle ahead too quickly and at potential risk for a crash.
  • Forward Automatic Braking, also called Automatic Emergency Braking (if equipped) – the number of times the vehicle detected that a forward collision was imminent and applied the brakes.
  • Reverse Automatic Braking (if equipped) – the number of times the vehicle detected that a rearward collision was imminent and applied the brakes.
  • Traction Control – the number of times the Traction Control System activated to reduce wheel spin or loss of traction.
  • Stability Control – the number of events which required the use of electronic stability control.
  • Antilock Braking System Active – The number of Antilock Brake System
  • Tailgating Alerts (if equipped)– the number of times the driver was alerted for following a vehicle ahead too closely.

Report Card Data
Cumulative Data is saved for all trips until the Report Card is reset or until the maximum count is exceeded. If the maximum count is exceeded for a Report Card line item, that item will no longer be updated in the Report Card until it is reset. Each item will report a maximum of 1,000 counts. The distance driven will report a maximum of 64 374 km (40,000 mi).

To delete Report Card data, do one of the following:

  • From the Report Card display, touch Reset.
  • Touch Clear PIN and All Teen Driver Keys from the Teen Driver This will also unregister any Teen Driver keys and delete the PIN.

Forgotten PIN
See your dealer to reset the PIN.

Trademarks and License Agreements

FCC Information

See Radio Frequency Statement page 344.

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 25

“Made for iPhone,” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPhone, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPhone may affect wireless  performance. iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 24

Trial length and service availability may vary by model, model year or trim. Service will automatically stop at the end of your trial subscription period unless you decide to continue service. If you do not wish to enjoy your trial, you can cancel by calling the number below. All SiriusXM services require a subscription, each sold separately by SiriusXM after the trial period. Service subject to the applicable SiriusXM Customer Agreement and Privacy Policy, visit www.siriusxm.com (USA) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada) to see complete terms and how to cancel which includes calling 1-866-635-2349 (USA) or 1-888-539-7474 (Canada). Some services and features are subject to device capabilities and location availability. Content varies by SiriusXM subscription package. All fees, content and features are subject to change.

SiriusXM with 360L: Some features, including steaming content and listening recommendations, require an active OnStar Connected Access plan and may vary by vehicle model. Content varies by SiriusXM subscription plan. GM connected vehicle services vary by vehicle model and require active service plan, working electrical system, cell reception and GPS signal. See onstar.com for details and limitations.

SiriusXM, Pandora, Stitchery and all related logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its respective subsidiaries.

SiriusXM satellite service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (and Puerto Rico with limited availability) and Canada.

In Canada: Some deterioration of service may occur in extreme northern latitudes. This is beyond the control of SiriusXM.

Explicit Language Notice: Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL” preceding the channel name.

Family-friendly packages are available by contacting SiriusXM:

It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SiriusXM Satellite Radio System or that support the SiriusXM website, the Online Service or any of its content.

General Requirements:

  1. A License Agreement from SiriusXM is required for any product that incorporates SiriusXM Technology and/or for use of any of the SiriusXM marks to be manufactured, distributed, or marketed in the SiriusXM Service Area.
  2. For products to be distributed, marketed, and/or sold in Canada, a separate agreement is required with Sirius XM Canada Inc.

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 26

TouchSense Technology and TouchSense System 1000 Series Licensed from Immersion Corporation. TouchSense System 1000 protected under one or more of the U.S. Patents at the following address www.immersion.com/patent-marking.html and other patents pending.

Bose
Bose AudioPilot and Bose Centerpoint surround are registered trademarks of Bose Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

Bluetooth
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

Java
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

MPEG4–AVC (H.264)
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC

VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE https://www.mpegla.com

VC-1
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD (“VC-1 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE https://www.mpegla.com

MPEG4–Visual
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD IS PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE BY A CONSUMER ENGAGING IN PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITIES.

MP3
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

WMV/WMA
This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and under a license from Microsoft Licensing, GP. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft Corporation and/or Microsoft Licensing, GP as applicable.

Map End User License Agreement
END USER TERMS
The Map Data SD card (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms (this “End User License Agreement”) and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and HERE North America, LLC (“HERE”) and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand.

The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including: © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen’s Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®.

HERE holds a nonexclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.

© United States Postal Service 2013. Prices are not established, controlled, or approved by the United States Postal Service. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Personal Use Only: You agree to use this Data for the solely personal, noncommercial purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, timesharing or other similar purposes. Except as otherwise set forth herein, you agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. You may transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis if you retain no copies and the recipient agrees to the terms of this End User License Agreement. Multi-disc sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you and not as a subset thereof.

Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by HERE and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not (a) use this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with, or in communication with, including without limitation, cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs.

Warning
This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, sources used, and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic data, any of which may lead to incorrect results.

No Warranty
This Data is provided to you “as is,” and you agree to use it at your own risk. HERE and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees, representations, or warranties of any kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error free.

Disclaimer of Warranty
THE DATABASE IS PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS” AND HARMAN (AND THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, ACCURACY, TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN ADVICE OR INFORMATION PROVIDED BY HARMAN (OR ANY OF THEIR LICENSORS, AGENTS, EMPLOYEES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS) SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, AND YOU ARE NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH ADVICE OR INFORMATION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDITION OF THIS AGREEMENT.

Disclaimer of Liability
HERE AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS DATA; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF HERE OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you.

Export Control
You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the Data provided to you or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations. Entire Agreement: These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between HERE (and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter.

Governing Law
The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois for any and all disputes, claims, and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder.

Government End Users
If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, this Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with this End User License Agreement, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following “Notice of Use,” and be treated in accordance with such Notice:

Buick Enclave 2023 Infotainment System User Manual 27

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) NAME:

HERE North America, LLC

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) ADDRESS:

425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL 60606.

This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to the End User License Agreement under which this Data was provided.

© 2014 HERE North America, LLC. All rights reserved.

If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify HERE prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data.

Unicode
Copyright © 1991-2010 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in https://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.

Free Type Project
Portions of this software are copyright © 2010 The FreeType Project (https://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.

Open Source SW
Further information concerning the OSS licenses is shown in the infotainment display.

QNX
Portions of this software are copyright © 2008-2011, QNX Software Systems. All rights reserved.

Part C – EULA
Copyright © 2011, Software Systems GmbH & Co. KG. All Rights Reserved.

The product you have purchased (“Product”) contains Software (Runtime Configuration No. 505962; “Software”) which is distributed by or on behalf of the Product manufacturer “Manufacturer”) under license from Software Systems Co. (“QSSC”). You may only use the Software in the Product and in compliance with the license terms below.

Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, QSSC hereby grants you a limited, non-exclusive, non-transferable license to use the Software in the Product for the purpose intended by the Manufacturer. If permitted by the Manufacturer, or by applicable law, you may make one backup copy of the Software as part of the Product software.

QSSC and its licensors reserve all license+C31 rights not expressly granted herein, and retain all right, title and interest in and to all copies of the Software, including all intellectual property rights therein. Unless required by applicable law you may not reproduce, distribute or transfer, or de-compile, disassemble or otherwise attempt to unbundle, reverse engineer, modify or create derivative works of, the Software. You agree: (1) not to remove, cover or alter any proprietary notices, labels or marks in or on the Software, and to ensure that all copies bear any notice contained on the original; and (2) not to export the Product or the Software in contravention of applicable export control laws.

EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, QSSC AND ITS LICENSORS PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE ON AN “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ANY WARRANTIES OR OTHER PROVISIONS OFFERED BY THE MANUFACTURER OR ITS DISTRIBUTOR(S) THAT DIFFER FROM THIS LICENSE ARE OFFERED BY THE MANUFACTURER OR ITS DISTRIBUTOR(S) ALONE AND NOT BY QSSC, ITS AFFILIATES OR THEIR LICENSORS. YOU ASSUME ANY RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THIS LICENSE.

EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW (SUCH AS IN THE CASE OF DELIBERATE OR GROSSLY NEGLIGENT ACTS), IN NO EVENT SHALL QSSC, ITS AFFILIATES OR THEIR LICENSORS BE LIABLE TO YOU UNDER ANY LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE, FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER ARISING AS A RESULT OF THIS LICENSE OR OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, PRODUCT FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES), EVEN IF QSSC, ITS AFFILIATES OR THEIR LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

WMA
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.

For more information on the Software, including any open source software license terms (and available source code) as well as copyright attributions applicable to the Runtime Configuration indicated above, please contact the Manufacturer or contact QSSC at 175 Terence Matthews Crescent, Kanata, Ontario, Canada K2M 1W8 (licensing@qnx.com).

Linotype
Helvetica is a trademark of Linotype Corp. registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain other jurisdictions in the name of Linotype Corp. or its licensee Linotype GmbH.

Usage in text form of each of the Licensed Trademarks is:

The trademark attribution requirements for the Licensed Trademarks may be viewed at https://www.linotype.com/2061-19414/trademarks.html.

END USER NOTICE
The marks of companies displayed by this product to indicate business locations are the marks of their respective owners. The use of such marks in this product does not imply any sponsorship, approval, or endorsement by such companies of this product.

FAQs

  1. What type of infotainment system does the Buick Encore GX 2023 have?
    Typically, a touchscreen infotainment system comes standard on the Buick Encore GX 2023. The screen, which typically has an 8-inch display, gives access to different multimedia options and vehicle settings.
  2. Does the Encore GX support Apple CarPlay and Android Auto?
    Yes, the Encore GX frequently supports both Android Auto and Apple CarPlay. These features give you access to your preferred apps, music, and navigation via a seamless integration of your compatible smartphone with the infotainment system.
  3. Can I make hands-free phone calls in the Encore GX?
    Yes, the Encore GX typically supports Bluetooth connectivity for hands-free phone calling. Using voice commands or controls mounted on the steering wheel, you can make and receive calls using your smartphone after connecting it to the system.
  4. Are there available USB ports in the Encore GX for device connectivity?
    Yes, the Encore GX typically comes with USB ports for connecting devices. You can plug in and charge compatible devices like smartphones and tablets using these ports, and you can also access media on USB drives.
  5. Does the Encore GX have a built-in navigation system?
    Yes, the Encore GX frequently comes with a built-in navigation system that is optional. Turn-by-turn directions are provided by this feature, which makes it simple for you to get where you’re going.
  6. What audio system options are available in the Encore GX?
    The Encore GX might come with different sound system options, such as a basic sound system and optional premium sound systems. For a better audio experience, these systems can be equipped with features like multiple speakers, subwoofers, and cutting-edge sound processing technologies.
  7. Are there physical knobs and buttons for controlling the infotainment system?
    The infotainment system on the Encore GX is typically controlled by physical knobs and buttons. These enable you to control volume, switch radio stations, and more without relying only on the touchscreen because they offer tactile feedback and are simple to use.
  8. Can I customize the home screen layout in the Encore GX’s infotainment system?
    The particular trim level and options may affect how the home screen layout can be changed. Depending on your preferences, you can arrange app icons and information on the home screen in some Encore GX models.
  9. Does the Encore GX have voice recognition for controlling the infotainment system?
    Yes, the Encore GX frequently comes with voice recognition software. This enables voice commands to be used to control the infotainment system’s various features, such as making phone calls, playing music, or navigating to specific locations.
  10. Are there available Wi-Fi hotspot capabilities in the Encore GX?
    The Encore GX might have Wi-Fi hotspot capabilities that are available. With the help of this feature, you can connect multiple devices to the car’s Wi-Fi network to get mobile internet access.
  11. Can I stream music from online platforms in the Encore GX?
    Yes, the Encore GX typically supports online music streaming. Through the infotainment system, you can access and play music from well-known streaming services when you’re online using a compatible device or Wi-Fi.
  12. Does the Encore GX have satellite radio?
    Yes, the Encore GX frequently has satellite radio available. This feature gives you access to numerous satellite radio channels that cover a variety of listening interests, including music, sports, news, and more.
  13. Can I connect multiple devices simultaneously to the Encore GX’s infotainment system?
    Yes, the Encore GX frequently permits multiple device connections at once. Passengers can now use their smartphones or other compatible devices to stream media, make hands-free calls, and access other infotainment features when connected to the system.
  14. Does the Encore GX support wireless charging for smartphones?
    Depending on the particular trim level and options, wireless charging may not always be available.

2023 Buick Encore Gx Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Useful Links

View Full Manual: Buick Encore GX 2023 User Manual | Auto User Guide
Download Manual: Manuals and Guides | Vehicle Support | Buick

Related Article

2024 Buick Envista Specs, Price, Features, Mileage and Review

2023 Buick Enclave Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2023 Buick Envision Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2024 Buick Encore GX Specs, Price, Features, Mileage and Review

Categories
Buick Encore GX

Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual

Buick Logo

Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual

Lighting in cars is more than just a practical necessity; it’s also a design element that can improve safety, visibility, and the general look of a car. The 2023 Buick Encore GX knows this well and takes it to heart by having a lighting system that combines form and function in a way that looks good. As the sun goes down and the night sky covers the road, the Encore GX precisely and elegantly lights the way ahead. LED headlights cut through the night and are surrounded by stylish daytime running lights that not only make the car more visible but also give it a unique look. From adaptive headlights that move with the road to LED taillights that leave a lasting impact, Buick has carefully designed a lighting system that puts safety, style, and a touch of luxury at the top of the list. Inside, the Encore GX has customizable ambient lighting that creates a warm and welcoming atmosphere. This makes every ride comfortable and style. In this look at the lighting features of the 2023 Buick Encore GX, we look at its different parts, each of which is meant to make the driver’s trip safer, more stylish, and a little bit brighter at every turn.

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 01

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

The exterior lamp control is on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column.

There are four positions.

Turns the exterior lamps off and deactivates the AUTO mode. Turn O again to reactivate the AUTO mode.

In Canada, the headlamps will automatically reactivate when the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

AUTO : Turns the exterior lamps on and off automatically depending on outside lighting.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 15Turns on the parking lamps including all lamps, except the headlamps.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 14Turns on the headlamps together with the parking lamps and instrument panel lights.

IntelliBeam® System
If equipped, this system turns the vehicle’s high-beam headlamps on and off according to surrounding traffic conditions.

The system turns the high-beam headlamps on when it is dark enough and there is no other traffic present.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 02

This light comes on in the instrument cluster when the IntelliBeam system is enabled.

Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam

Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 03

To enable the IntelliBeam system, press Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 02 on the turn signal lever when it is dark outside and the exterior lamp control is in AUTO or Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 14. The blue high-beam on light appears on the instrument cluster when the high beams are on.

Driving with IntelliBeam
The system only activates the high beams when driving over 40 km/h (25 mph).
There is a sensor near the top center of the windshield that automatically controls the system. Keep this area of the windshield clear of debris to allow for best system performance.

The high-beam headlamps remain on, under the automatic control, until one of the following situations occurs:

  • The system detects an approaching vehicle’s headlamps.
  • The system detects a preceding vehicle’s
  • The outside light is bright enough that high-beam headlamps are not required.
  • The vehicle’s speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph).
  • The IntelliBeam system is disabled by the button on the turn signal lever. If this happens, press b on the turn signal lever when the exterior lamp control is in the AUTO or 5 position to reactivate the IntelliBeam system. The instrument cluster light will come on to indicate the IntelliBeam system is reactivated.

The high beams may not turn off automatically if the system cannot detect another vehicle’s lamps because of any of the following:

  • The other vehicle’s lamps are missing, damaged, obstructed from view, or otherwise undetected.
  • The other vehicle’s lamps are covered with dirt, snow, and/or road spray.
    • The other vehicle’s lamps cannot be detected due to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray, mist, or other airborne
    • The vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked, or obstructed by something that blocks the view of the light sensor.
    • The vehicle is loaded such that the front end points upward, causing the light sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and taillamps.
    • The vehicle is being driven on winding or hilly roads.
  • The IntelliBeam system may need to be disabled if any of the above conditions exist.Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
    Push the turn signal lever away from you and release, to turn the high beams on. To return to low beams, push the lever again or pull it toward you and release.
  • Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 04
  • This indicator light turns on in the instrument cluster when the high-beam headlamps are on.
  •  
  • Flash-to-Pass
    The flash-to-pass feature works with the low beams or Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on or off. To flash the high beams, pull the turn signal lever toward you momentarily and then release it.
  • Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
    DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. Fully functional DRL are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.The DRL system comes on in daylight when the following conditions are met:
    • The ignition is on.
    • The exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
    • The light sensor determines it is daytime.
  • When the DRL are on, the taillamps, sidemarker lamps, instrument panel lights, and other lamps will not be on. The DRL turn off when the headlamps are turned to O or the ignition is off. For vehicles sold in Canada, this control only works when the vehicle is parked.The regular headlamp system should be turned on when needed.
  • Automatic Headlamp System
    When the exterior lamp control is set to AUTO and it is dark enough outside, the headlamps come on automatically.Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 05
  • There is a light sensor on top of the instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor; otherwise the headlamps will come on when they are not needed. The system may also turn on the headlamps when driving through a parking garage or tunnel.When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will turn off or may change to DRL.The automatic headlamp system turns off when the exterior lamp control is turned to O or the ignition is off.Lights On with Wipers
    If the windshield wipers are activated in daylight with the engine on, and the exterior lamp control is in AUTO, the headlamps, parking lamps, and other exterior lamps come on. The transition time for the lamps coming on varies based on wiper speed. When the wipers are not operating, these lamps turn off. Move the exterior lamp control to O or ; to disable this feature.
  • Hazard Warning Flashers
  • Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual06
  • Press to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns others that you are having trouble. Press | again to turn the flashers off.

Turn and Lane-Change Signals

Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 07

Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change.

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change is complete. If the lever is moved momentarily to the lane change position, the arrow will flash three times. It will flash six times if Tow/ Haul Mode is active.

The lever returns to its starting position when it is released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change, the arrow flashes rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb may be burned out.

Have any burned out bulbs replaced. If a bulb is not burned out, check the fuse. See Instrument Panel Fuse Block page 284.

Fog Lamps

Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 08

The fog lamps button is on the instrument panel beside the steering wheel.

To turn on the fog lamps, the ignition and the headlamps or parking lamps must be on.

If equipped, press to turn on or off. An indicator light on the instrument cluster comes on when the fog lamps are on.

Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps

Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination Control

Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual09

This feature adjusts the brightness of all illuminated controls. The instrument panel illumination control is next to the exterior lamp control.

Push the knob in all the way until it extends out and then turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the lights. Push the knob back in when finished.

The knob is functional at night, or when the headlamps or parking lamps are ON.

Courtesy Lamps
The courtesy lamps come on when any door is opened ,on the remote key is pressed, or when the vehicle is turned off. See Dome Lamps page 125.

Dome LampsBuick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 10

The front dome lamp controls are in the overhead console.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 1Press to turn the lamps off, even when any door is opened Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 2 on the remote key is pressed, or when the vehicle is turned off.

When the button is returned to the middle position, the lamps turn on automatically when any door is opened, K on the remote key is pressed, or when the vehicle is turned off

Press to turn on the dome lamps.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 11

If equipped, the rear dome lamp controls are in the headliner above the rear seats.

Reading Lamps
There are reading lamps on the overhead console and over the rear seats. These lamps come on when any door is opened Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 2 on the remote key is pressed, or when the vehicle is turned off.

To operate, the vehicle must be on, in accessory mode, or using Retained Accessory Power (RAP)

Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 13

Front Reading Lamps

The front reading lamps are in the overhead console.

Press the lamp lenses to turn the front reading lamps on or off

Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 14

Rear Reading Lamps

If equipped with dual sunroof, the rear reading lamps are over the rear seats.

Press the lamp lens to turn the rear passenger reading lamps on or off.

Lighting Features

Entry Lighting
The interior lamps turn on when pressing Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 2 on the remote key or opening any doors, and the dome lamp control is in the door position.

Some exterior lamps also turn on when pressing Buick Encore GX 2023 Lighting User Manual 2 on the remote key or opening any doors. Low-Beam lamps will only turn on briefly at night, or in areas with limited lighting.

All lamps will gradually fade out after about 30 seconds.

Entry lighting can be disabled manually by closing all doors, pressing  on the remote key, or starting the vehicle.

This feature can be changed. On the infotainment home page, select the Settings icon T Vehicle T Vehicle Locator Lights.

Exit Lighting
Some exterior lamps and interior lamps turn on when the driver door is opened after the vehicle is turned off.

The exterior and interior lamps remain on for a set amount of time, then automatically turn off.

The interior lights turn on when the vehicle is turned off.

The exterior lamps turn off immediately by turning the exterior lamp control off.

This feature can be changed. On the infotainment home screen, select the Settings icon T Vehicle T Exit Lighting.

Battery Load Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that estimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all of the power needed for very high electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power whenever needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the driver. If so, a DIC message might be displayed and it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.

Battery Power Protection
This feature helps prevent the battery from being drained, if the interior courtesy lamps or reading lamps are accidentally left on.

If any of these lamps are left on, they automatically turn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition is off. The lamps will not come back on again until one of the following occurs:

  • The ignition is turned on.
  • The doors are closed and then re-opened.

Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
The exterior lamps turn off about 10 minutes after the vehicle is turned off, if the parking lamps or headlamps have been manually left on. This protects against draining the battery. To restart the 10-minute timer, turn the exterior lamp control to the O position and then back to the ; or 2 position.

To keep the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, the vehicle must be on or in accessory mode.

FAQ

What type of headlights are available on the 2023 Buick Encore GX?

The 2023 Buick Encore GX typically comes with LED headlights as standard or available options, depending on the trim level.

Do the headlights have an automatic on/off feature?

Yes, most models of the Encore GX come equipped with automatic headlights that turn on and off based on ambient lighting conditions.

Are there LED daytime running lights (DRLs)?

Yes, LED daytime running lights are often integrated into the headlight design for improved visibility during the day.

Can the headlight intensity be adjusted?

The intensity of the headlights can often be adjusted manually through the vehicle’s settings to suit the driver’s preference.

Are adaptive headlights available?

Some trim levels may offer adaptive headlights that can adjust their direction and intensity based on the vehicle’s speed and steering angle.

What type of fog lights are available?

Fog lights are typically available on certain trim levels, providing enhanced visibility in adverse weather conditions.

Are there LED taillights on the 2023 Buick Encore GX?

Yes, the Encore GX often features LED taillights, which are energy-efficient and provide improved visibility to other drivers.

Do the taillights have a unique signature or design?

Buick often incorporates its distinctive signature lighting elements into the taillight design for a stylish and recognizable look.

Is there interior ambient lighting?

Some trim levels may offer interior ambient lighting, allowing the driver to customize the cabin’s lighting color and intensity for a more personalized driving experience.

Are there LED turn signal indicators on the side mirrors?

Yes, the Encore GX often includes LED turn signal indicators on the side mirrors for improved visibility and safety.

Can the interior lighting be adjusted?

Yes, the interior lighting is typically adjustable, allowing passengers to control the brightness and ambiance inside the cabin.

Does the Encore GX have automatic high-beam headlights?

Some trim levels may offer automatic high-beam headlights, which can switch between high and low beams based on traffic conditions.

Is there approach lighting or puddle lighting?

Approach lighting or puddle lighting, which illuminates the ground around the vehicle when approaching or exiting, may be available on certain trim levels.

Are there interior reading lights for passengers?

Yes, interior reading lights are often included in the Encore GX’s design to provide convenient illumination for passengers.

Categories
Buick Encore GX

Buick Encore GX 2023 Storage User Manual

Buick Logo

Buick Encore GX 2023 Storage User Manual

The storage system in the 2023 Buick Encore GX is flexible and well thought out, making it a good choice for people who want a small SUV with a lot of cargo room. The Encore GX’s storage options are made to fit your needs, whether you’re going on a daily task, going away for the weekend, or going on a longer trip. It has about 23.5 cubic feet of cargo space with the back seats up, which is plenty of room for food, sports gear, or luggage. When the back seats are folded down, the space for cargo grows to a big 50.2 cubic feet, which is great for carrying large items or packing for long trips. This car has a lot of space, but it also has clever storage choices, like hidden compartments, a flexible seating arrangement, and accessories that can help you keep things in order. Whether you live in a busy city or like to go on adventures, the Buick Encore GX will give you the space you need for every trip.

Storage Compartments

Storage Compartments
Warning
Do not store heavy or sharp objects in storage compartments. In a crash, these objects may cause the cover to open and could result in injury.

Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.

Cupholders

Buick Encore GX 2023 Storage User Manual 01

Two cupholders are in the center console.
Cupholders may be located in the rear seat armrest. To access, pull the armrest down.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Storage User Manual 02

Center Console Storage

Buick Encore GX 2023 Storage User Manual 03

There is a storage area in the center console in front of the shift lever.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Storage User Manual 04

There is also a storage area in the center console in front of the armrest.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Storage User Manual 05

The center console has storage under the armrest. Push the latch and lift the armrest to open. There may be a small storage bin inside. Remove the small bin to access more storage.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Storage User Manual 06

There may also be a storage area in the center console for passengers in the rear.

Additional Storage Features

Rear Compartment/Storage Panel Cover
Quarter Lower Storage Panel

Buick Encore GX 2023 Storage User Manual 07

Cargo Cover
Warning
An unsecured cargo cover could strike people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. Store the cargo cover securely or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not place objects on the cargo cover.
Sudden stops or turns can cause objects to be thrown in the vehicle. You or others could be injured.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Storage User Manual 08

Use the cargo cover to cover items in the rear of the vehicle.

Installing the Cargo Cover

  1. Slide the cargo cover into the two front corner brackets and push down until it snaps in place.
  2. Attach the cords to the fixed retainers on the liftgate.

Removing the Cargo Cover
Disengage the cords on the liftgate, lift up on the cover, and pull the cover out of the vehicle.

Cargo Tie-Downs

Buick Encore GX 2023 Storage User Manual 09

The vehicle may be equipped with four cargo tie-downs in the rear compartment.

Cargo Management System Lift

Buick Encore GX 2023 Storage User Manual 10

Lift the load floor to access the cargo management system.
After storing items, make sure to properly secure the load floor.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Storage User Manual 11

The cargo management system has a height adjustment. Place the load floor on the holders.
To access the spare tire, lift the load floor and place it into the load floor holding slots.
See Tire Changing page 304

Convenience Net

Buick Encore GX 2023 Storage User Manual 12

This vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear of the vehicle. Attach it to the cargo tie-downs for storing small loads.
Do not use the net to store heavy loads..

Roof Rack System

Warning
If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is longer or wider than the roof rack — like paneling, plywood, or a mattress — the wind can catch it while the vehicle is being driven. The item being carried could be violently torn off, and this could cause a collision and damage the vehicle. Never carry something longer or wider than the roof rack on top of the vehicle unless using a GM certified accessory carrier.

If equipped, the roof rack can be used to load items. For roof racks that do not have crossrails included, GM certified crossrails can be purchased as an accessory. See your dealer

The vehicle may be equipped with side-rails for a roof rack system. Cargo must be secured with properly installed cross rails and other accessories designed to carry cargo. These can be purchased from your dealer.

Caution
Loading cargo on the roof rack that weighs more than 75 kg (165 lb) or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage the vehicle. Do not load cargo exceeding 75 kg (165 lbs) and always load cargo so that it rests evenly between the crossrails and does not block the vehicle lamps or windows. Fasten the cargo securely.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Storage User Manual 13

To prevent damage or loss of cargo when driving, check to make sure crossrails and cargo are securely fastened. Loading cargo on the roof rack will make the vehicle’s center of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking, or abrupt maneuvers; otherwise it may result in loss of control. If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, occasionally stop the vehicle to make sure the cargo remains in its place. Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading the vehicle. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see Vehicle Load Limits page 190.

FAQ

What is the storage capacity of the 2023 Buick Encore GX?

The 2023 Buick Encore GX offers a versatile storage capacity with various seating configurations. With the rear seats up, it provides approximately 23.5 cubic feet of cargo space.

How much cargo space is available with the rear seats folded down?

When you fold down the rear seats of the 2023 Buick Encore GX, you can expand the cargo capacity to approximately 50.2 cubic feet, making it suitable for larger items or a substantial amount of luggage.

Are there any hidden storage compartments in the Encore GX?

Yes, the Buick Encore GX often includes hidden storage compartments, such as underfloor storage in the cargo area, which is ideal for storing smaller items securely out of sight.

Can you adjust the cargo area to accommodate different types of cargo?

Yes, the cargo area in the 2023 Buick Encore GX can be adjusted to accommodate different types of cargo. The rear seats have a 60/40 split-folding design, allowing you to configure the seating and cargo space according to your needs.

Does the Buick Encore GX have a power liftgate for easier access to the storage area?

Some trim levels of the 2023 Buick Encore GX may offer a power liftgate, which provides convenient access to the storage area. This feature can be particularly useful when your hands are full.

Are there any cargo organization accessories available for the Encore GX?

Buick often offers various cargo organization accessories for the Encore GX, such as cargo nets, dividers, and trays, which can help you keep your belongings organized and secure in the storage area.

Can you tow a trailer with the 2023 Buick Encore GX for additional storage options?

Yes, the Buick Encore GX may offer towing capabilities, allowing you to tow a small trailer if you need additional storage for items like camping gear, bikes, or other equipment.

Is there a spare tire in the Encore GX’s storage area?

Typically, the Buick Encore GX comes equipped with a spare tire, which is usually located in the storage area beneath the cargo floor. It’s essential to know its location in case you ever need it.

Are there any interior storage compartments for personal items?

Yes, the Encore GX typically features various interior storage compartments for personal items, including a center console, door pockets, cupholders, and a glove compartment.

Can you fold down the front passenger seat to accommodate longer items?

The ability to fold down the front passenger seat to accommodate longer items may depend on the specific trim level and configuration of the 2023 Buick Encore GX. Check the owner’s manual or consult with a dealer for details.

Is there a panoramic sunroof in the Encore GX, and does it affect storage space?

The presence of a panoramic sunroof in the Encore GX may vary by trim level. If equipped, it typically does not significantly impact storage space, but it’s essential to be aware of the available headroom.

Does the Encore GX offer a roof rack for additional storage options?

Some trim levels of the Buick Encore GX may come with roof rails or offer them as an option. Roof racks can be added to accommodate items like roof boxes, skis, or bikes for extra storage.

How is the overall interior storage and cabin space in the 2023 Encore GX?

The Encore GX is designed to offer a comfortable and spacious cabin with ample interior storage options, making it suitable for daily use and longer trips.

Are there any advanced technology features related to storage in the Encore GX?

Some trim levels of the 2023 Buick Encore GX may include advanced technology features related to storage, such as a hands-free power liftgate or a configurable infotainment system that assists with navigation and storage management.

Does the Encore GX have a spare tire, and where is it located?

The 2023 Buick Encore GX typically comes equipped with a spare tire, which is usually located beneath the cargo floor in the storage area. It’s essential to know its location and how to access it in case of a flat tire.

Useful Link

View Full Manual: Buick Encore GX 2023 User Manual | Auto User Guide
Buick Encore GX 2023 Instruments and Controls User Manual

Categories
Buick Encore GX

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual

Buick Logo

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual

Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints

Warning
With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly.

Front Seats
The vehicle’s front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions.

Buick Enclave 2023 Storage User Manual 01

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The height of the head restraint can be adjusted.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 01

To raise or lower the head restraint, press the button located on the side of the head restraint, and pull up or push the head restraint down, and release the button. Pull and push on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The front seat outboard head restraints are not removable.

Rear Seats
The vehicle’s second row seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions.
The height of the head restraint can be adjusted. Pull the head restraint up to raise it. Try to move the head restraint to make sure that it is locked in place.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 03

To lower the head restraint, press the button, located on the top of the seatback, and push the head restraint down. Try to move the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place.

Folding the Rear Head Restraint
The head restraint can be folded rearward to allow for better visibility when the rear seat is unoccupied.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 04

To fold the head restraint, press the button on the side of the head restraint.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 05

The head restraint will fold rearward automatically.
When an occupant or child restraint is in the seat, always return the head restraint to the full upright position. Pull the head restraint up and forward until it locks into place.
Push and pull on the head restraint to make sure that it is locked.

Always adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.
Rear outboard head restraints are not removable.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment
Seat Position
Warning
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a driver seat while the vehicle is moving. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving.Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 05

To adjust a manual seat:

  1. Pull the handle at the front of the seat.
  2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the handle.
  3. Try to move the seat back and forth to be sure it is locked in place.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 08

If equipped, move the lever up or down to manually raise or lower the seat.

Power Seat Adjustment
Warning
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a driver seat while the vehicle is moving. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
The power seats will work with the ignition off. Children could operate the power seats and be injured. Never leave children alone in the vehicle.
Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 09

To adjust the seat:

  • Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward.
  • Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down.
  • Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the rear of the control up or down.

To adjust the seatback, see Reclining Seatbacks page 37.

To adjust the lumbar support, see Lumbar Adjustment page 38.

Reclining Seatbacks
Warning
If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked.

Manual Reclining SeatbacksBuick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 10

To recline the seatback:

  1. Lift the lever. If necessary, move the seat belt out of the way to access the lever.
  2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place.

Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position:

  1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback, and the seatback returns to the upright position.
  2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

Warning
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even when buckled up, the seat belts cannot do their job.
The shoulder belt will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear the seat belt properly.

Buick Enclave 2023 Storage User Manual 07

Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 12

  • Tilt the top of the control rearward to recline.
  • Tilt the top of the control forward to raise.

Lumbar Adjustment

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 13Press and hold the control forward to increase or rearward to decrease support.

Memory Seats

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 14

Overview

If equipped, the memory seat feature allows drivers to save their unique driving positions and a shared exit position. See “Saving Seating Positions” later in this section. The saved positions can be recalled manually by all drivers, see “Manually Recalling Seating Positions” later in this section, and drivers with remote key 1 and 2 can also recall them automatically. See “Auto Seat Entry Memory Recall” or “Auto Seat Exit Memory Recall” later in this section. To enable automatic recalls, turn on Seat Entry Memory and/or Seat Exit Memory. See “Enabling Automatic Recalls” later in this section. The memory recalls may be cancelled at any time during the recall. See “Cancel Memory Seating Recalls” later in this section.

Identifying Driver Number
The vehicle identifies the current driver by their remote key number 1–8. The current remote key number may be identified by Driver Information Center (DIC) welcome message, “You are driver x for memory recalls.” This message is displayed the first few times the vehicle is turned on when a different remote key is used. For Seat Entry Memory to work properly, save positions to the 1 or 2 memory button matching the driver number of this welcome message. To aid in identifying remote key IDs, it is recommended to only carry one remote key when entering the vehicle. Perform the following if the welcome message is not displayed:

  1. Move all keys and remote keys away from the vehicle.
  2. Start the vehicle with another remote key. A DIC welcome message should display indicating the driver number of the other remote key. Turn the vehicle off and remove the other key or remote key from the vehicle.
  3. Start the vehicle with the initial key or remote key. The DIC welcome message should display the driver number of the initial remote key.

Saving Seating Positions
Read these instructions completely before saving memory positions.

To save preferred driving positions to 1 and 2:

  1. Turn the vehicle on or to accessory mode. A DIC welcome message may indicate the driver number of the current remote key. See “Identifying Driver Number” previously in this section.
  2. Adjust all available memory features to the desired driving position.
  3. Press and release SET; a beep will sound.
  4. Immediately upon releasing SET, press and hold memory button 1 or 2 matching the current Driver’s remote key number until two beeps sound. If too much time passes between releasing SET and pressing 1 or 2, the two beeps will not sound indicating memory position were not saved. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to try again.
  5. Repeat Steps 1–4 for the other remote key 1 or 2 using the other 1 or 2 memory button.

It is recommended to save the preferred driving positions to both 1 and 2 if you are the only driver.

To save the common exit seating position to B that is used by all drivers for Manually Recalling Seating Positions and Auto Seat Exit Memory Recall features, repeat Steps 1– 4 using B, the exit button.

Manually Recalling Seating Positions
Press and hold 1, 2, or B button until the recall is complete, to recall the positions previously saved to that button.
Manual Memory recall movement for 1, 2 or B buttons may be initiated and will complete to the saved memory position if the vehicle is in or out of P (Park).

Enabling Automatic Recalls

  • Seat Entry Memory moves the driver seat to the selected 1 or 2 position when the vehicle is started. Select Settings > Vehicle
  • Seating Position > Seat Entry Memory > ON or See “Auto Seat Entry Memory Recall” later in this section.
  • Seat Exit Memory moves the driver seat to the preferred exit position of the B button when the vehicle is turned off and the door is opened. Select Settings > Vehicle > Seating Position > Seat Exit Memory > ON or OFF. See “Auto Seat Exit Memory Recall” later in this section.

Auto Seat Entry Memory Recall

Seat Entry Memory will automatically begin movement to the seating positions of the 1 or 2 button corresponding to the driver’s remote key number 1 or 2 detected by the vehicle when:

  • The vehicle is turned on.
  • Seating positions have been previously saved to the same 1 or 2 button. See “Saving Seating Positions” previously in this section.
  • Seat Entry Memory is enabled. See “Enabling Automatic Recalls” previously in this section.
  • The vehicle is in P (Park).

Seat Entry Memory Recall will continue if the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) prior to reaching the saved memory position.

If the saved memory seat position does not automatically recall, verify the recall is enabled. See “Enabling Automatic Recalls” previously in this section.

If the memory seat recalls to the wrong position, the driver’s remote key number 1 or 2 may not match the memory button number positions they were saved to. Try the other remote key or try saving the positions to the other 1 or 2 memory button. See “Saving Seating Positions” previously in this section.

Automatic Seat Entry Memory recalls are only available for driver’s remote key numbers 1 and 2. Remote keys 3–8 will not provide Seat Entry Memory recalls.

Auto Seat Exit Memory Recall
Seat Exit Memory will begin movement to the seating position of the Buick Enclave 2023 Doors and Windows User Manual 10.

button when:
The vehicle is turned off and the driver door is open or opened within a short time.
A seating position has been previously been saved to theBuick Enclave 2023 Doors and Windows User Manual 10 memory button. See “Saving Seating Positions” previously in this section.

  • Seat Exit Memory is enabled. See “Enabling Automatic Recalls” previously in this section.
  • The vehicle is in P (Park).

Seat Exit Memory recall will continue if the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) prior to reaching the saved memory position.

Seat Exit Memory is not linked to the driver’s remote key. The seating position saved to B is used for all drivers.

Cancel Memory Seating Recalls

  • During any memory recall: Press a power seat control Press SET memory button
  • During Manual memory recall:
    Release 1, 2, or B memory button
    During Auto Seat Entry Memory Recall: Turn vehicle off
    Press SET, 1, 2, or B memory buttons
    During Auto Seat Exit Memory Recall: Press SET, 1, 2, or B memory buttons

Obstructions
If something has blocked the seat while recalling a memory position, the recall may stop. Remove the obstruction and try the recall again. If the memory position still does not recall, see your dealer.

Heated Front Seats
Warning
If temperature change or pain to the skin cannot be felt, the seat heater may cause burns. To reduce the risk of burns, use care when using the seat heater, especially for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, cover, or similar item. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat heater may cause a burn or may damage the seat.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 15

If equipped, the buttons are near the climate controls on the center stack.
To operate, the engine must be running.
Press M or L to heat the driver or passenger seatback and cushion.
Press C or  if available, to ventilate the driver or passenger seat. A ventilated seat has a fan that pulls or pushes air through the seat. The air is not cooled.

When this feature is off, the heated and ventilated seat symbols on the buttons are white. When a heated seat is turned on, the symbol turns red. When a ventilated seat is turned on, the symbol turns blue.

Press the button once for the highest setting. With each press of the button, the seat will change to the next lower setting, and then to the off setting. The indicator lights next to the buttons indicate three for the highest setting and one for the lowest. If the heated seats are on high, the level may automatically be lowered after approximately 30 minutes.

The passenger seat may take longer to heat up.

Remote Start Heated and Ventilated Seats
During a remote start, the heated or ventilated seats, if equipped, can be turned on automatically. When it is cold outside, the heated seats turn on, and when it is hot outside the ventilated seats turn on. The heated or ventilated seats may be canceled when the vehicle is turned on. Press the heated or ventilated seat button to use the heated or ventilated seats after the vehicle is started.
The heated or ventilated seat indicator lights do not turn on during a remote start.
The temperature performance of an unoccupied seat may be reduced. This is normal.
To enable or disable remote start heated or ventilated seats, select Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, and Start > Remote Start Auto Heat Seats or Remote Start Auto Cool Seats > ON or OFF. See Remote Vehicle Start page 14.

Folding Seatback
The front passenger seatback may fold flat.

 Warning
If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo is not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating airbag might force that object toward a person. This could cause severe injury or even death. Secure objects away from the area in which an airbag would inflate. Where Are the Airbags? page 53. Vehicle Load Limits page 190.

Warning
Things you put on this seatback can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. Remove or secure all items before driving.

To fold the seatback:

  1. Lower the head restraint all the See
    Head Restraints page 34.
  2. Move the seat as far back as possible.
    See Seat Adjustment page 36 or Power Seat Adjustment page 36.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 16
  3. Lift the lever fully and fold the seatback forward. If necessary, move the seat belt out of the way to access the lever.

Continue lowering the seatback until it is completely folded and locks in place.
To raise the seatback:

  1. Lift the lever fully to unlock the seatback. Then, raise the seatback and push it rearward until it re-engages.
  2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked in place.

Warning
If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked.

Rear Seats

Rear Seat Reminder

If equipped, the message REAR SEAT REMINDER LOOK IN REAR SEAT displays under certain conditions indicating there may be an item or passenger in the rear seat. Check before exiting the vehicle.

This feature will activate when a second row door is opened while the vehicle is on or up to 10 minutes before the vehicle is turned on. There will be an alert when the vehicle is turned off. The alert does not directly detect objects in the rear seat; instead, under certain conditions, it detects when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seat.

The feature is active only once each time the vehicle is turned on and off, and will require reactivation by opening and closing the second row doors. There may be an alert even when there is nothing in the rear seat; for example, if a child entered the vehicle through the rear door and left the vehicle without the vehicle being shut off.

The feature can be turned on or off. Select Settings > Vehicle > Rear Seat Reminder > ON or OFF.

Folding the Seatback
Either side of the seatback can be folded for more cargo space. Fold a seatback only when the vehicle is not moving.

Caution
Folding a rear seat with the seat belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the seat belts. Always unbuckle the seat belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat.

To fold the seatback:

  1. Fold the head restraint. See Head
    Restraints page 34.
  2. Make sure the seat belt is in the retainer hook.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 17
  3. Pull the lever on top of the seatback to unlock the seatback.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 18
  4. A red indicator near the seatback lever is exposed when the seatback is unlocked.
  5. Fold the seatback down
    Repeat Steps 1–3 for the other seatback, if desired.

Raising the Seatbacks
Warning
If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked.

Warning
A seat belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear  seatback, always check to be sure that the seat belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted.

To raise a seatback:

  1. Lift the seatback up and push it rearward to lock it in place.
    A red indicator near the seatback lever retracts when the seatback is locked in place.
    he center rear seat belt may lock when you raise the seatback. If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and start again.
  2. Return the head restraint to the upright position. See Head Restraints page 34.
  3. Push and pull the top of the seatback to be sure it is locked into position.
  4. Check if the seat belt is stowed within hook at side. If not, stow seat belt in it appropriately.
  5. Repeat the steps to raise the other seatback, if necessary.

When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in the upright, locked position.

Rear Seat Armrest

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 19

The rear seat has an armrest in the center of the seatback. Lower the armrest to access the cupholders.

To fold, lift the armrest up and push it rearward until it is flush with the seatback.

Seat Belts

This section describes how to use seat belts properly, and some things not to do.

Warning
Do not let anyone ride where a seat belt cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your passenger(s) are not wearing seat belts, injuries can be much worse than if you are wearing seat belts. You can be seriously injured or killed by hitting things inside the vehicle harder or by being ejected from the vehicle. In addition, anyone who is not buckled up can strike other passengers in the vehicle.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, passengers riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow passengers to ride in any area of the vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Always wear a seat belt, and check that all passenger(s) are restrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the seat belts. See Seat Belt Reminders page 98.

Why Seat Belts Work

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 20

When riding in a vehicle, you travel as fast as the vehicle does. If the vehicle stops suddenly, you keep going until something stops you. It could be the windshield, the instrument panel, or the seat belts!

When you wear a seat belt, you and the vehicle slow down together. There is more time to stop because you stop over a longer distance and, when worn properly, your strongest bones take the forces from the seat belts. That is why wearing seat belts makes such good sense.

Questions and Answers About Seat Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a seat belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a seat belt or not. Your chance of being conscious during and after a crash, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear seat belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only. They work with seat belts — not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection.

Also, in nearly all states and in all Canadian provinces, the law requires wearing seat belts.

How to Wear Seat Belts Properly

Follow these rules for everyone’s protection.

There are additional things to know about seat belts and children, including smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the vehicle, see Older Children page 62  or.

Infants and Young Children page 63 . Review and follow the rules for children in addition to the following rules.

It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing seat belts.

There are important things to know about wearing a seat belt properly.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 21

  • Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you (if possible).
  • Wear the lap part of the belt low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.

If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.

  • Wear the shoulder belt over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.

Warning
You can be seriously injured, or even killed, by not wearing your seat belt properly.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 22

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 23

Never allow the lap or shoulder belt to become loose or twisted.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 24

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 25

Never wear the shoulder belt under both arms or behind your back.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 26

Always use the correct buckle for your seating position.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 27

Never route the lap or shoulder belt over an armrest.

Warning
The seat belt can be pinched if it is routed under plastic trim on the seat, such as trim around the rear seatback folding handle or side airbag. In a crash, pinched seat belts might not provide adequate protection. Never allow seat belts to be routed under plastic trim pieces.

Warning
You can be seriously injured or killed if the shoulder belt is worn behind your back, under your legs, or wrapped around your neck. The shoulder belt can tighten but cannot be loosened if it is locked. The shoulder belt locks when it is pulled all the way out of the retractor. It unlocks when the shoulder belt is allowed to go all the way back into the retractor, but it cannot do this if it is wrapped around you. You may have to cut the seat belt if it is locked and tightened around you.

Lap-Shoulder Belt

All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seating position with a detachable seat belt and the seat belt is not attached, see Third Row Seats page 46 for instructions on reconnecting the seat belt to the mini-buckle.

The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.

  1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 28
  2.  Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not le t it get twisted.
    The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
    If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature may be engaged. See Child Restraint Systems page 65 . If this occurs, let the belt go back all the way and start again. If the locking feature stays engaged after letting the belt go back to stowed position on the seat, move the seat rearward or recline the seat until the shoulder belt retractor lock releases.
    Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the front outboard seating position may affect the passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System page 57.
    If the webbing locks in the latch plate before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate flat to unlock.
    Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 30
  3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
  4. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Seat Belt Extender page 50.
    Position the release button on the buckle so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.Buick Enclave 2023 Storage User Manual 45
  5. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster” later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information.
  6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt.
    It may be necessary to pull stitching on the seat belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

Buick Enclave 2023 Storage User Manual 42

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should return to its stowed position.

Always stow the seat belt slowly. If the seat belt webbing returns quickly to the stowed position, the retractor may lock and cannot be pulled out. If this happens, pull the seat belt straight out firmly to unlock the webbing, and then release it. If the webbing is still locked in the retractor, see your dealer.

Before a door is closed, be sure the seat belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a seat belt, damage can occur to both the seat belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt should be close to, but not contacting, the neck. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in a crash. See How to Wear Seat Belts Properly page 46.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 34

To move the shoulder belt height adjuster down, push up on the release button and move the height adjuster to the desired.
position. You can move the height adjuster up by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide.

After the height adjuster is set to the desired position, try to move it down without pressing the release button to make sure it has locked into position.

Seat Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has seat belt pretensioners for the front outboard occupants. Although the seat belt pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the seat belt assembly. They can help tighten the seat belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met. Seat belt pretensioners can also help tighten the seat belts in a side crash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, the pretensioners and probably other parts of the vehicle’s seat belt system will need to be replaced. See Replacing Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash page  51

Do not sit on the outboard seat belt while entering or exiting the vehicle or at any time while sitting in the seat. Sitting on the seat belt can damage the webbing and hardware.

Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides
Rear seat belt comfort guides may provide added seat belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the shoulder belt away from the neck and head.

Comfort guides are available through your dealer for the rear outboard seating positions. Instructions are included with the guides.

Seat Belt Use During Pregnancy
Seat belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear seat belts.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual35

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a seat belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making seat belts effective is wearing them properly.

Seat Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s seat belt will fasten around you, you should use it.

But if a seat belt is not long enough, your dealer will order you an extender. Only a GM dealer issued extender should be used. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child restraints. For more information on the proper use and fit of seat belt extenders see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.

Safety System Check
Periodically check the seat belt reminder, seat belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), and seat belt anchorages to make sure they are all in working order. Look for any other loose or damaged seat belt system parts that might keep a seat belt system from performing properly. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn, frayed, or twisted seat belts may not protect you in a crash.

Torn or frayed seat belts can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, have it replaced immediately. If a belt is twisted, it may be possible to untwist by reversing the latch plate on the webbing.

If the twist cannot be corrected, ask your dealer to fix it.

Make sure the seat belt reminder light is working. See Seat Belt Reminders page 98.

Keep seat belts clean and dry. See Seat Belt Care page 51.

Seat Belt Care

Keep belts clean and dry.

Seat belts should be properly cared for and maintained.

Seat belt hardware should be kept dry and free of dust or debris. As necessary, exterior hard surfaces and seat belt webbing may be lightly cleaned with mild soap and water. Ensure there is not excessive dust or debris in the mechanism. If dust or debris exists in the system please see the dealer. Parts may need to be replaced to ensure proper functionality of the system.

Warning
Do not bleach or dye seat belt webbing. It may severely weaken the webbing. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean and rinse seat belt webbing only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Allow the webbing to dry.

Replacing Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash
Warning
A crash can damage the seat belt system in the vehicle. A damaged seat belt system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the seat belt systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.

After a minor crash, replacement of seat belts may not be necessary. But the seat belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer to have the seat belt assemblies inspected or replaced.

New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the seat belt system was not being used at the time of the crash.

Have the seat belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash, or if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light page 99.

Airbag System

The vehicle has the following airbags:

  • A frontal airbag for the driver
  • A frontal airbag for the front outboard passenger
  • A front center airbag for the driver and front outboard passenger
  • A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
  • A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the front outboard passenger
  • A roof-rail airbag for the driver and for the second and third row passengers seated directly behind the driver
  • A roof-rail airbag for the front outboard passenger and the second and third row passengers seated directly behind the front outboard passenger

All vehicle airbags have the word AIRBAG on the trim or on a label near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the center of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the front outboard passenger.
For the front center airbag, the word AIRBAG is on the inboard side of the driver seatback.
For seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the side of the seatback or side of the seat closest to the door.
For roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by seat belts. Even though today’s airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system:

Warning
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your seat belt, even with airbags. Airbags are designed to work with seat belts, not replace them. Also, airbags are not designed to inflate in every crash. In some crashes seat belts are the only restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? page  55
Wearing your seat belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to the seat belts. Everyone in the vehicle should wear a seat belt properly, whether or not there is an airbag for that person.

Warning
Because airbags inflate with great force and faster than the blink of an eye, anyone who is up against, or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to any airbag, as you would be if sitting on the edge of the seat or leaning forward. Seat belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear a seat belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. The seat belts and the front outboard passenger airbags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the front center armrest or console in vehicles with a front center airbag.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags.

Warning
Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Always secure children properly in the vehicle. To read how, see Older Children page  65 or Infants and Young Children page 66.

Buick Enclave 2023 Storage User Manual 49

There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light page 99.

Where Are the Airbags?

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual37

The driver frontal airbag is in the center of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passenger frontal airbag is in the passenger side instrument panel.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual38

The driver knee airbag is below the steering column. The front outboard passenger knee airbag is below the glove box.

Buick Enclave 2023 Storage User Manual 52

Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

The driver and front outboard passenger seat-mounted side impact airbags are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door.

Buick Enclave 2023 Storage User Manual 53

Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

The driver and front outboard passenger seat-mounted side impact airbags are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual 41

On vehicles with second row seat-mounted side impact airbags, they are in the sides of the seatback closest to the door.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual410

Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver, front outboard passenger, and second and third row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows.

Warning
If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering.
Do not use seat or console accessories that block the inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag or the front center airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie-down through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?

This vehicle is equipped with airbags. See Airbag System page 55. Airbags are designed to inflate if the impact exceeds the specific airbag system’s deployment threshold.

Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. The vehicle has electronic sensors that help the airbag system.

determine the severity of the impact. Deployment thresholds can vary with specific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries, mainly to the driver’s or front outboard passenger’s head and chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will or should inflate is not based primarily on how fast the vehicle is traveling. It depends on what is hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds depending on whether the vehicle hits an object straight on or at an angle, and whether the object is fixed or moving, rigid or deformable, narrow or wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, in rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle has advanced technology frontal airbags. Advanced technology frontal airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity.

The front center airbag is designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending upon the location of the impact, when either side of the vehicle is struck. In addition, the front center airbag is designed to inflate when the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over on its side. The front center airbag is not designed to inflate in frontal impacts, near frontal impacts, or rear impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending on the location of the impact. These airbags may also inflate in some moderate to severe frontal impacts. Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not designed to inflate in rollovers or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag is designed to inflate on the side of the vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending on the location of the impact. In addition, these roof-rail airbags may inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact.

Roof-rail airbags are not designed to inflate in rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags may inflate when either side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over on its side, or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the vehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover. The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Are the Airbags? page 53.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection provided by seat belts by distributing the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first, second, and third rows. The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events, although no system can prevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in many types of collisions, primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? page 55.

Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to seat belts.

What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates?
After frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not even realize the airbags inflated. The front center airbag and roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they inflate. Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags? page 53.

The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle .

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the vehicle damage or repair costs.

Warning
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags inflate. The feature may also activate, without airbag inflation, after an event that exceeds a predetermined threshold. After turning the ignition off and then on again, the fuel system will return to normal operation; the doors can be locked, the interior lamps can be turned off, and the hazard warning flashers can be turned off using the controls for those features.

If any of these systems are damaged in the crash they may not operate as normal.

Warning
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may have also damaged important functions in the vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may be concealed damage that could make it difficult to safely operate the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the engine after a crash has occurred.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the front outboard passenger airbag.

  • Airbags are designed to inflate only After an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the airbag system.

If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

  • The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy page  344 and Event Data Recorders page 344.
  • Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the front outboard passenger position. The passenger airbag status indicator will light on the overhead console when the vehicle is started.

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual42

United States

Buick Encore GX 2023 Seats and Restraints User Manual43

Canada

The words ON and OFF, and the symbols for on and off, will be visible during the system check. When the system check is complete, either the word ON or OFF, and the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 099

The passenger sensing system turns off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. No other airbag is affected by the passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front outboard passenger seat and seat belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag should be allowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size.

Whenever possible, children aged 12 and under should be secured in a rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag inflates .

Warning
A child in a rear-facing c